SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
FORM 10-K
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1999
COMMISSION FILE NUMBER: 0-11223
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
PENNSYLVANIA 95-3701137
(State or other jurisdiction of (I.R.S. Employer
incorporation or organization) Identification No.)
606 BROADWAY
SANTA MONICA, CALIFORNIA 90401
(Address of principal executive offices) (Zip Code)
Registrant's telephone number, including area code: (310) 458-1521
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
COMMON STOCK $0.008 PAR VALUE AMERICAN STOCK EXCHANGE
(Title of Class) (Name of exchange on which registered)
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: NONE
INDICATE BY CHECK MARK WHETHER THE REGISTRANT (1) HAS FILED ALL REPORTS REQUIRED
TO BE FILED BY SECTION 13 OR 15(D) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 DURING
THE PRECEDING 12 MONTHS (OR FOR SUCH SHORTER PERIOD THAT THE REGISTRANT WAS
REQUIRED TO FILE SUCH REPORTS), AND (2) HAS BEEN SUBJECT TO SUCH FILING
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PAST 90 DAYS. YES X NO
--- ----
Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405
of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the
best of Registrant's knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements
incorporated by reference in Part III of the Form 10-K or any amendment to this
Form 10-K. [_X_]
The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the
Registrant as of February 29, 2000 was $9,899,926.
The number of shares of $0.008 par value common stock outstanding as of February
29, 2000 was 2,030,754.
================================================================================
<PAGE>
FORM 10-K
---------
TABLE OF CONTENTS AND CROSS REFERENCE SHEET
-------------------------------------------
PAGE
PART I
- ------
Item 1. Business 3
Item 2. Properties 27
Item 3. Legal Proceedings 27
Item 4. Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders 28
PART II
- -------
Item 5. Market for Registrant's Common Equity 28
and Related Stockholder Matters
Item 6. Selected Financial Data 30
Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial 31
Condition and Results of Operations
Item7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About
Market Risk 55
Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data 56
Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants
on Accounting and Financial Disclosure 57
PART III
- --------
Item 10. Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant 57
Item 11. Executive Compensation 59
Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial
Owners and Management 61
Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions 64
PART IV
- -------
Item 14. Exhibits, Consolidated Financial Statement Schedules and
Reports on Form 8-K 64
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SCHEDULES
<PAGE>
PART I
ITEM 1. BUSINESS
Certain statements in this report on Form 10K constitute
"forward-looking statements" under the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act
of 1995 which involve risks and uncertainties. These forward-looking statements
relate to, among other things, expectations of the business environment in which
the Company operates, projections of future performance, perceived opportunities
in the market and statements regarding the Company's mission and vision. The
Company's actual results may differ significantly from the results discussed in
such forward-looking statements. Factors that might cause such a difference
include, but are not limited to, economic conditions, competition in the
geographic and business areas in which the Company conducts operations,
fluctuations in interest rates, credit quality, year 2000 data systems
compliance, and government regulations. For a discussion of the factors that
might cause such a difference, see Item 1. Business - "Factors That May Affect
Future Results."
Professional Bancorp, Inc.
Professional Bancorp, Inc. (the "Company") is a bank holding company
organized as a corporation under the laws of the State of California in July
1981 and reincorporated under the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in
August 1989. As a bank holding company, the Company is subject to the Bank
Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended ("BHCA"). The Company commenced
operations in August 1982. On the commencement date and from the proceeds of its
initial stock offering, the Company purchased all of the outstanding stock of
First Professional Bank, National Association (the "Bank").
The Company's principal business is to serve as a holding company for
the Bank and for other banking or finance-related subsidiaries which the Company
may establish or acquire. At December 31, 1999, the Company had total
consolidated assets of approximately $273.5 million, total consolidated net
loans of approximately $156.5 million, total consolidated deposits of
approximately $256.0 million and total consolidated shareholders' equity of
approximately $14.9 million. The discussion and analysis for the year ended
December 31, 1999 reflect the operations of the Company, the Bank and
Professional Bancorp Mortgage, Inc. ("PBMI"). See Item 7 - Management's
Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, for a
discussion of the Company's assets and revenues for the past three fiscal years.
First Professional Bank, National Association
The Bank was organized in August 1982 and commenced operations as a
federally chartered national bank. The Bank's strategy is to deliver value-added
products and services that satisfy the financial services needs of its targeted
customers, the health care services sector, emphasizing superior service and
relationships. The Bank provides a wide range of commercial banking products and
services primarily directed towards the health care community, which includes,
physicians, independent practice associations (IPA), practice management
companies (PPM), preferred provider organizations (PPO), medical billing
management companies, home health agencies and hospital based practices.
Professional Bancorp Mortgage, Inc.
On November 18, 1998, Professional Bancorp Mortgage, Inc. ("PBMI")
commenced operations as a majority-owned subsidiary of the Bank. The Bank's
strategy was to provide clients access to new products through a co-venture
partnership with REIS Mortgage Holdings, Inc. ("REIS"). REIS is a provider of
mortgage brokerage services and has been a long-standing referral partner of the
Bank. Due to changing market conditions, the Bank ceased operations of the
subsidiary effective January 1, 2000.
3
<PAGE>
REGULATORY AGREEMENT
As the Bank's principal regulator, the Office of the Comptroller of
the Currency ("OCC") examines and evaluates the financial condition, operations
and policies and procedures of nationally chartered banks on a regular basis as
part of its legally prescribed oversight responsibilities. The OCC conducted an
examination in 1999 which identified deficiencies in the Bank's loan
underwriting and administration policies and procedures. The OCC determined that
the Bank required special supervisory attention. To implement corrective action,
the OCC and the Bank entered into a formal regulatory agreement (the "Formal
Agreement") on March 22, 2000. See Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis
of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - "Regulatory Agreement" for
more information.
PRINCIPAL MARKETING AREA
The principal service areas of the Bank consist of the California
counties of Los Angeles, Orange, Riverside, San Bernardino and Ventura with a
full-service office at its Santa Monica headquarters and four full-service
branches located in Beverly Hills, Tarzana, Pasadena and Redlands. In addition,
the Bank has a limited service facility in Los Angeles within the proximity of
Cedars Sinai Medical Center. Since inception, the Bank has operated an in-house
courier service which permits the Bank to serve areas outside of each branch's
immediate vicinity. Couriers are licensed branches of the Bank and able to
facilitate limited banking transactions.
COMMERCIAL BANKING
The Bank is engaged in the business of general commercial banking.
The services which are offered include those traditionally offered by commercial
banks, such as checking and savings accounts, time certificates of deposit, and
commercial, consumer/installment, home equity and short-term real estate loans.
The Bank also offers cashier's checks, travelers checks, safe deposit boxes,
night deposit facilities, wire transfers, notary services, courier services,
mortgage brokering, merchant accounts, TouchTone Banking and five bank owned
24-hour automated teller machines which are located at the Bank's Santa Monica,
Cedars Sinai Medical Center, Tarzana, Pasadena and Redlands facilities. Client
access to the Bank is also available through most ATM networks.
COMPETITION
The Bank faces competition in attracting both deposits and
originating loans. The Bank's competition in loans comes principally from
community based, regional and multi-regional commercial banks, asset based
finance companies, savings and loan associations, mortgage companies, and to a
lesser degree, thrift and loan companies, credit unions and insurance companies.
Many of the nation's largest commercial banks and savings and loan associations
with which the Bank competes have significantly greater lending limits than the
Bank and perform other services for their customers which the Bank can offer
only through correspondents or other vendors, if at all. Deregulation of the
banking industry and increased competition from non-bank entities for the cash
balances of individuals and businesses has had and will continue to have an
impact on the competitive position of the Bank. Among the advantages of these
larger institutions is their ability to make larger loans, finance extensive
advertising campaigns, access international money markets and generally allocate
their assets to regions of highest yield and demand. Management believes that
its most direct competition for deposits comes from commercial banks, stock
brokerage firms, savings and loan associations, thrift and loan companies and
credit unions. In addition, competition for deposits may be expected to arise
from corporate and governmental debt securities, as well as money market mutual
funds. The Bank does not have a significant market share of the deposits or
loans in the northern or southern California marketplace.
In order to compete with other financial service entities in its
service area, the Bank relies principally upon promotional activity and personal
contacts obtained through its officers, directors, employees and shareholders to
attract and maintain relationships. The Bank's promotional activities emphasize
the advantages of banking with an institution familiar with the particular needs
of the health care community. Additionally, the Bank is informed of the current
trends and changing financial services needs of the health care industry through
membership in trade associations, directorships of health care organizations and
through feedback from existing health care clients of the Bank.
4
<PAGE>
This longstanding and continued presence of the Bank in its niche is
a valuable marketing factor, which not only serves well for clients and
prospects, but serves as a major competitive advantage. For clients whose credit
demands exceed the Bank's lending limits, the Bank attempts to arrange for such
loans on a participated basis with institutions who desire to work with the Bank
to leverage its industry expertise. The Bank also assists clients requiring
services not offered by the Bank by obtaining these services through its
correspondent banks and/or other joint relationships.
SUPERVISION AND REGULATION
INTRODUCTION
- ------------
Banking is a complex, highly regulated industry. The primary goals of
the regulatory scheme are to maintain a safe and sound banking system, protect
depositors and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation's insurance fund, and
facilitate the conduct of sound monetary policy. In furtherance of these goals,
Congress and the states have created several largely autonomous regulatory
agencies and enacted numerous laws that govern banks, bank holding companies and
the banking industry. Consequently, the growth and earnings performance of the
Company and the Bank can be affected not only by management decisions and
general economic conditions, but also by the requirements of applicable state
and federal statutes and regulations and the policies of various governmental
regulatory authorities, including:
- the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the "FRB");
- the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (the "OCC"); and
- the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (the "FDIC").
The system of supervision and regulation applicable to the Company
and the Bank establishes a comprehensive framework for their respective
operations. Federal and state laws and regulations generally applicable to
financial institutions, such as the Company and the Bank, regulate, among other
things:
- the scope of business that they may conduct;
- investments that they can make;
- reserves that must be maintained against deposits;
- capital levels that must be maintained relative to the amount and risks
associated with assets;
- the nature and amount of collateral that may be taken to secure loans;
- the establishment of new branches;
- mergers and consolidations with other financial institutions; and
- the amount of dividends that the Company and the Bank may pay.
The following summarizes the material elements of the regulatory
framework that applies to the Company and any subsidiaries, including the Bank.
It does not describe all of the statutes, regulations and regulatory policies
that are applicable. Also, it does not restate all of the requirements of the
statutes, regulations and regulatory policies that are described. Consequently,
the following summary is qualified in its entirety by reference to the
applicable statutes, regulations and regulatory policies. Any change in
applicable laws, regulations or regulatory policies may have a material effect
on the business of the Company and the Bank.
SUPERVISION AND REGULATION - THE COMPANY
GENERAL. The Company, as a bank holding company registered under the
BHCA, is subject to regulation by the FRB. According to FRB policy, the Company
is expected to act as a source of financial strength for the Bank and to commit
resources to support it in circumstances where the Company might not otherwise
do so. Under the BHCA, the Company and its subsidiaries are subject to periodic
examination by the FRB. The Company is also required to file periodic reports of
its operations and any additional information regarding its activities and those
of its subsidiaries with the FRB, as may be required.
5
<PAGE>
The Company is also a bank holding company within the meaning of
Section 3700 of the California Financial Code. As such, the Company and its
subsidiaries are subject to examination by, and may be required to file reports
with, the Commissioner of the California Department of Financial Institutions
(the "Commissioner"). Regulations have not yet been proposed or adopted or steps
otherwise taken to implement the Commissioner's powers under this statute.
BANK HOLDING COMPANY LIQUIDITY. The Company is a legal entity,
separate and distinct from the Bank. Although there exists the ability to raise
capital on its own behalf or borrow from external sources, it may also obtain
additional funds through dividends paid by, and fees for services provided to,
the Bank. However, regulatory constraints may restrict or totally preclude the
Bank from paying dividends to the Company.
The Company is entitled to receive dividends, when and as declared by
the Bank's Board of Directors, out of funds legally available, as specified and
limited by the OCC's Regulations. Pursuant to the OCC's Regulations, funds
available for a national bank's cash dividends are restricted to the lesser of
the bank's: (i) retained earnings; or (ii) net income for the current and past
two fiscal years (less any dividends already paid during such period), unless
approved in advance by the OCC. Furthermore, if the OCC determines that a
dividend would cause a bank's capital to be impaired or that payment would cause
it to be undercapitalized, the OCC can prohibit payment of a dividend if it is
an unsafe and unsound banking practice.
Since the Bank is an FDIC insured institution, it is therefore
possible, depending upon its financial condition and other factors, that the
FDIC could assert that the payment of dividends or other payments might, under
some circumstances, constitute an unsafe or unsound practice and thereby
prohibit such payments.
TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES. The Company and any subsidiaries it may
purchase or organize are deemed to be affiliates of the Bank within the meaning
of Sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act. Pursuant thereto, loans by
the Bank to affiliates, investments by the Bank in affiliates' stock, and taking
affiliates' stock by the Bank as collateral for loans to any borrower will be
limited to 10% of the Bank's capital, in the case of any one affiliate, and will
be limited to 20% of the Bank's capital in the case of all affiliates. In
addition, such transactions must be on terms and conditions that are consistent
with safe and sound banking practices; in particular, a bank and its
subsidiaries generally may not purchase from an affiliate a low-quality asset,
as defined in the Federal Reserve Act. Such restrictions also prevent a bank
holding company and its other affiliates from borrowing from a banking
subsidiary of the bank holding company unless the loans are secured by
marketable collateral of designated amounts. The Company and the Bank are also
subject to certain restrictions with respect to engaging in the underwriting,
public sale and distribution of securities. (See "Supervision and Regulation -
The Bank - Recent Legislation and Regulatory Developments - 1.
Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act - Facilitating Affiliations and Expansion of Financial
Activities" herein.)
LIMITATIONS ON BUSINESSES AND INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES. Under the BHCA,
a bank holding company must obtain the FRB's approval before:
- directly or indirectly acquiring more than 5% ownership or control of
any voting shares of another bank or bank holding company;
- acquiring all or substantially all of the assets of another bank; or
- merging or consolidating with another bank holding company.
The FRB may allow a bank holding company to acquire banks located in
any state of the United States without regard to whether the acquisition is
prohibited by the law of the state in which the target bank is located.
In approving interstate acquisitions, however, the FRB must give
effect to applicable state laws limiting the aggregate amount of deposits that
may be held by the acquiring bank holding company and its insured depository
institutions in the state in which the target bank is located, provided that
those limits do not discriminate against out-of-state depository institutions or
their holding companies, and state laws which require that the target bank have
been in existence for a minimum period of time, not to exceed five years, before
being acquired by an out-of-state bank holding company.
6
<PAGE>
In addition to owning or managing banks, bank holding companies may
own subsidiaries engaged in certain businesses that the FRB has determined to be
"so closely related to banking as to be a proper incident thereto." The Company,
therefore is permitted to engage in a variety of banking-related businesses.
Some of the activities that the FRB has determined, pursuant to its Regulation
Y, to be related to banking are:
- making or acquiring loans or other extensions of credit for its own
account or for the account of others; o servicing loans and other
extensions of credit;
- operating a trust company in the manner authorized by federal or state
law under certain circumstances;
- leasing personal and real property or acting as agent, broker, or
adviser in leasing such property in accordance with various restrictions
imposed by FRB regulations;
- providing financial, banking, or economic data processing and data
transmission services;
- owning, controlling, or operating a savings association under certain
circumstances;
- selling money orders, travelers' checks and U.S. Savings Bonds;
- providing securities brokerage services, related securities credit
activities pursuant to Regulation T, and other incidental activities;
and
- underwriting and dealing in obligations of the U.S., general obligations
of states and their political subdivisions, and other obligations
authorized for state member banks under federal law.
- Federal law prohibits a bank holding company and any subsidiary banks
from engaging in certain tie-in arrangements in connection with the
extension of credit. Thus, for example, the Bank may not extend credit,
lease or sell property, or furnish any services, or fix or vary the
consideration for any of the foregoing on the condition that:
- the customer must obtain or provide some additional credit, property or
services from or to the Bank other than a loan, discount, deposit or
trust service;
- the customer must obtain or provide some additional credit, property or
service from or to the Company the Bank; or o the customer may not
obtain some other credit, property or services from competitors, except
reasonable requirements to assure soundness of credit extended.
Generally, the BHCA does not place territorial restrictions on the
domestic activities of non-bank subsidiaries of bank holding companies.
On November 12, 1999, the President signed into law the
Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (the "GLB Act" or the "Financial Modernization Act"). The
GLB Act significantly changed the regulatory structure and oversight of the
financial services industry. The GLB Act permits banks and bank holding
companies to engage in previously prohibited activities under certain
conditions. Also, banks and bank holding companies may affiliate with other
financial service providers such as insurance companies and securities firms
under certain conditions. Consequently, a qualifying bank holding company,
called a financial holding company ("FHC"), can engage in a full range of
financial activities, including banking, insurance, and securities activities,
as well as merchant banking and additional activities that are beyond those
permitted for traditional bank holding companies. Moreover, various non-bank
financial services providers which were previously prohibited from engaging in
banking can now acquire banks while also offering services such as securities
underwriting and underwriting and brokering insurance products. The GLB Act also
expands passive investment activities by FHCs, permitting them to indirectly
invest in any type of company, financial or nonfinancial, through merchant
banking activities and insurance company affiliations. (See "Supervision and
Regulation - The Bank - Recent Legislation and Regulatory Developments - 1.
Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act" herein.)
CAPITAL ADEQUACY. Bank holding companies must maintain minimum levels
of capital under the FRB's risk-based capital adequacy guidelines. If capital
falls below minimum guideline levels, a bank holding company, among other
things, may be denied approval to acquire or establish additional banks or
non-bank businesses.
7
<PAGE>
The FRB's risk-based capital adequacy guidelines for bank holding
companies and state member banks, discussed in more detail below (see
"Supervision and Regulation - The Bank - Recent Legislation and Regulatory
Developments - 4. Risk-Based Capital Guidelines" herein), assign various risk
percentages to different categories of assets, and capital is measured as a
percentage of risk assets. Under the terms of the guidelines, bank holding
companies are expected to meet capital adequacy guidelines based both on total
risk assets and on total assets, without regard to risk weights.
The risk-based guidelines are minimum requirements. Higher capital
levels will be required if warranted by the particular circumstances or risk
profiles of individual organizations. For example, the FRB's capital guidelines
contemplate that additional capital may be required to take adequate account of,
among other things, interest rate risk, or the risks posed by concentrations of
credit, nontraditional activities or securities trading activities. Moreover,
any banking organization experiencing or anticipating significant growth or
expansion into new activities, particularly under the expanded powers under the
GLB Act, would be expected to maintain capital ratios, including tangible
capital positions, well above the minimum levels.
LIMITATIONS ON DIVIDEND PAYMENTS. Section 1551 of the Pennsylvania
Business Corporation Law of 1988 (the "PBCL") provides that the board of
directors may authorize a business corporation to make distributions to
shareholders subject to certain limitations. A distribution to shareholders may
not be made if: (i) the corporation would be unable to pay its debts as they
become due in the usual course of business; or (ii) the total assets of the
corporation would be less than the sum of its total liabilities, plus the amount
that would be needed, if the corporation were to be dissolved, to satisfy the
preferential rights upon dissolution of shareholders whose preferential rights
are superior to those receiving the distribution.
Additionally, the FRB's policy regarding dividends provides that a
bank holding company should not pay cash dividends exceeding its net income or
which can only be funded in ways that weaken the bank holding company's
financial health, such as by borrowing. The FRB also possesses enforcement
powers over bank holding companies and their non-bank subsidiaries to prevent or
remedy actions that represent unsafe or unsound practices or violations of
applicable statutes and regulations.
SUPERVISION AND REGULATION - THE BANK
GENERAL. As a national banking association which is a member of the
Federal Reserve System and whose deposits are insured by the FDIC up to the
maximum extent provided by law, the Bank is subject to regulation, supervision
and regular examination by the OCC, the FDIC and the FRB. California law exempts
all banks from usury limitations on interest rates. Supervision, regulation and
examination of the Bank by regulatory agencies are generally intended to protect
depositors and the FDIC's insurance fund and not the Bank's shareholder.
RECENT LEGISLATION AND REGULATORY DEVELOPMENTS. From time to time
legislation is proposed or enacted which has the effect of increasing the cost
of doing business and changing the competitive balance between banks and other
financial and non-financial institutions. Various federal laws enacted over the
past several years have provided, among other things, for the maintenance of
mandatory reserves with the FRB on deposits by depository institutions (state
reserve requirements have been eliminated); the phasing-out of the restrictions
on the amount of interest which financial institutions may pay on certain of
their customers' accounts. Federal regulators have been given increased
authority and means for providing financial assistance to insured depository
institutions and for effecting interstate and cross-industry mergers and
acquisitions of failing institutions. These laws have generally had the effect
of altering competitive relationships existing among financial institutions,
reducing the historical distinctions between the services offered by banks,
savings and loan associations and other financial service providers, and
increasing the cost of funds to banks and other depository institutions.
8
<PAGE>
1. GRAMM-LEACH-BLILEY ACT
GENERAL. The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act was signed into law on November
12, 1999. The GLB Act represents the most significant revision of the banking
and financial services industry laws since the Depression Era by revising the
BHCA and permitting full affiliations with other financial service providers.
The GLB Act permits a qualified bank holding company, called a financial holding
company, to engage in a full range of financial activities including banking,
insurance, securities activities, as well as merchant banking and other
activities that are financial in nature. The following discusses the more
significant elements of the GLB Act.
FACILITATING AFFILIATIONS AND EXPANSION OF FINANCIAL ACTIVITIES.
---------------------------------------------------------------
The GLB Act:
- eliminates many federal and state barriers to affiliations
among banks and securities firms, insurance companies, and
other financial service providers;
- establishes a statutory framework for permitting full
affiliations to occur;
- provides financial organizations with flexibility in
structuring new financial affiliations through the FHC
structure or through a bank financial subsidiary, with
certain safeguards and limitations;
- preserves the role of the FRB as the umbrella supervisory
authority for those FHCs, while incorporating a system of
functional regulation designed to utilize the strengths of
various federal and state regulatory authorities; and
- establishes a mechanism for coordination between the FRB
and the Secretary of the Treasury (the "Secretary")
regarding the approval of new financial activities for both
holding companies and financial subsidiaries of national
banks.
Safety and soundness is also emphasized by requiring that banks and
holding companies be "well capitalized" and "well managed" in order to engage in
the new activities and affiliations contemplated by the GLB Act, with the
appropriate regulators given authority to address any failure to maintain safety
and soundness standards in a prompt manner.
FINANCIAL AFFILIATIONS AND ACTIVITIES. The GLB Act repeals previous
statutory prohibitions by permitting bank holding companies and FRB member banks
to engage in previously prohibited activities and affiliations. Specifically,
the GLB Act adds Section 6 to the BHCA, designating qualifying bank holding
companies engaging in the new, permissible financial activities and affiliations
as FHCs. In order for a bank holding company to qualify as an FHC, its
subsidiary depository institutions must be "well managed," "well capitalized,"
and have at least a "satisfactory" Community Reinvestment Act ("CRA") rating as
of their last examination.
On January 19, 2000, the FRB adopted interim regulations under
Subpart I of Regulation Y implementing the FHC provisions of the GLB Act. The
interim regulations, subject to revision, became effective March 11, 2000. Under
the interim regulations, a bank holding company must submit a declaration to the
FRB stating that the company elects to become an FHC and a certification that
all depository institutions controlled by the company are "well capitalized" and
"well managed." Providing that those requirements are met and that the
depository institutions have at least a "satisfactory" CRA rating, the election
to become an FHC is effective on the 31st day after the FRB receives the
election.
If any of an FHC's subsidiary depository institutions fails to retain
a "well managed" or "well capitalized" status, the FHC must execute an agreement
with the FRB within 45 days after notice of the deficiency, agreeing to
implement specific corrective measures to return the FHC to compliance. After
the agreement is executed, the FHC will have 180 days to correct any management
or capital deficiencies. Until the FRB has determined that the deficiencies have
been corrected, the FRB may impose any conditions or limitations on the conduct
or activities of an FHC or on any of its affiliates that the FRB deems
appropriate and consistent with the BHCA and the FHC and its affiliates may not
engage in any additional activities permitted by the GLB Act without the FRB's
prior approval.
9
<PAGE>
If the FHC fails to correct the capital and management deficiencies
within 180 days, the FRB may require the FHC to divest itself of any insured
depository institutions or the FRB may require the FHC to cease engaging (both
directly and through any subsidiary that is not a depository institution or a
subsidiary of a depository institution) in all activities that are not otherwise
permissible for a traditional bank holding company pursuant to the FRB's
Regulation Y.
If any one of an FHC's depository institution falls out of compliance
with the "satisfactory" CRA rating requirement, the FHC may continue existing
activities permitted by the GLB Act. However, the FHC may not commence any
additional GLB Act activities, or acquire direct or indirect control of any
entity engaged in such activities.
The GLB Act permits FHCs to engage in non-banking activities beyond
those permitted for traditional bank holding companies. Rather than requiring
that the non-banking activities be "closely related to banking," FHCs may engage
in those that the FRB determines to be financial in nature, incidental to
activities that are financial in nature, or complimentary to financial
activities. The GLB Act enumerates certain permissible activities that the FRB
considers financial in nature. FHCs, however, may only engage in complimentary
financial activities if the FRB determines that the complimentary activities do
not pose a substantial risk to the safety and soundness of the FHC's depository
institutions or the financial system in general.
For those expanded financial activities that are not specifically
enumerated in the GLB Act, the FRB has the primary authority to determine which
activities are financial in nature, incidental or complimentary, and may act by
regulation or order. However, the FRB may not act unilaterally. Pursuant to the
GLB Act, a consultive process between the FRB and the Secretary is required. The
Secretary may also make similar proposals to the FRB with respect to determining
whether proposed activities are financial in nature or incidental to financial
activities regarding financial subsidiaries of national banks. Such a process is
intended to bring a balance to the determinations regarding the type of
activities that are financial and limit so-called "regulatory shopping" by
financial service providers.
A qualifying FHC may engage in any new activity enumerated in the GLB
Act without receiving prior approval from the FRB. Rather, the FHC is only
required to file a notice with the FRB within 30 days after the activity is
commenced or a company is acquired. The new activities enumerated in the GLB Act
which are specifically considered financial in nature include:
- underwriting insurance or annuities, or acting as an insurance or
annuity principal, agent or broker;
- providing financial or investment advice;
- issuing or selling interests in pools of assets that a bank could hold;
- all underwriting, dealing in or making markets in securities without any
revenue limitation;
- engaging within the United States in any activity that a bank holding
company could engage in outside of the country, if the FRB determined,
before the GLB Act, that the activity was usual in connection with
banking or other financial operations internationally;
- sponsoring and distributing all types of mutual funds;
- investment company activities;
- merchant banking equity investment activities;
- insurance company equity investments; and
- engaging in any activity that the FRB determined before the GLB Act to
be permitted for a bank holding company that is not an FHC.
The most significant of the new activities authorized by the GLB Act
are merchant banking and insurance company portfolio investment powers. Before
enactment of the GLB Act, bank holding companies were limited in their ability
to make equity investments, including controlling equity investments, to
entities that were engaged in activities that were closely related to the
business of banking. At the same time securities and insurance companies were
free to make merchant banking and insurance company portfolio investments in
virtually any kind of financial or non-financial company.
10
<PAGE>
Recognizing that such investments are financial in nature, the GLB
Act substantially expands the authority of an FHC to make controlling equity
investments in any kind of entity, including those engaged in non-financial
activities.
MERCHANT BANKING. The GLB Act permits FHC's to make controlling
equity investments in virtually any business entity (including those that engage
in non-financial activities) by permitting the FHC to engage in merchant banking
activities. In order to engage in merchant banking activities:
- the investment must not be made by a depository institution subsidiary
of the FHC, or by a subsidiary of a depository institution;
- the FHC must own a securities affiliate;
- the investment must be made as part of a BONA FIDE underwriting or
merchant or investment banking activity, including investment activities
engaged in for the purpose of appreciation and ultimate resale or
disposition of the investment;
- the investment must be held for a period of time to enable the sale or
disposition thereof on a reasonable basis consistent with the financial
viability of the BONA FIDE underwriting or merchant or investment
banking activity; and
- the FHC must not routinely manage or operate the entity in which the
investment is made, except as may be required to obtain a reasonable
return on investment upon sale or disposition.
INSURANCE COMPANY PORTFOLIO INVESTMENTS. The GLB Act permits FHCs to
affiliate with insurance companies. The GLB Act recognizes that, as part of
their ordinary business, insurance companies frequently invest funds received
from policy holders in most or all of the shares of stock of a company that may
not be engaged in a financial activity.
New Section 4(k)(4)(I) of the BHCA permits an insurance company that
is affiliated with a depository institution to continue insurance company
portfolio investment activities, provided that certain requirements are met.
Specifically, the investments held by an insurance company affiliate of a
depository institution must:
- be acquired and held by an insurance company that is predominantly
engaged in underwriting life, accident and health, or property and
casualty insurance, or in providing and issuing annuities;
- represent investments made in the ordinary course of the insurance
company's business, according to relevant state insurance laws governing
such investments; and
- not be routinely managed or operated by the FHC, except as may be
necessary or required to obtain a reasonable return.
To the extent that an FHC does participate in management of the
portfolio, participation would be limited to safeguarding the investments under
the applicable requirements of state insurance laws.
The GLB Act imposes other restrictions on equity investment
activities of FHCs. First, a depository institution controlled by an FHC may not
cross market the products or services of a company in which the FHC has made a
merchant banking or insurance company portfolio investment (a "portfolio
company"), and VICE VERSA. However, the GLB Act does not prevent a nonbank
affiliate of an FHC and a portfolio company from cross marketing each other's
products.
Second, a controlling investment made pursuant to the GLB Act's
merchant banking or insurance company portfolio investment authority would make
the portfolio company an "affiliate" of the FHC's depository institution for
purposes of Sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act. Moreover, the GLB
Act establishes a presumption that an investment of 15% or more in the equity of
a portfolio company will make the portfolio company an affiliate. Thus, an
affiliated depository institution's credit and asset purchase transactions will
be subject to the "covered transaction" restrictions of Sections 23A and 23B of
the Federal Reserve Act, including quantitative limits, collateral requirements,
and the "arms'-length" transaction standard.
11
<PAGE>
The Riegle-Neal Act was amended to apply its prohibitions against
establishment of deposit production offices to interstate branches acquired or
established under the GLB Act, including all branches of a bank owned by an
out-of-state bank holding company.
PREEMPTION OF STATE LAW. The GLB Act affirms that the states are the
primary legal authority to regulate the insurance business and related
activities. However, in their regulation of insurance activities, state laws are
pre-empted to the extent that they prohibit the affiliations permitted under the
GLB Act. States may not prevent or restrict depository institutions or their
affiliates from engaging in any activity permitted under the GLB Act, such as
insurance sales, solicitations and cross-marketing. States, however are allowed
to continue regulating other insurance activities such as licensing and
requiring that insurance companies maintain certain levels of capital.
Additionally, state regulation of other activities is not pre-empted,
even if they do prevent or restrict an activity permitted under the GLB Act, so
long as they do not discriminate. Consequently, state securities regulations are
not pre-empted with respect to a state's ability to investigate and enforce
certain unlawful transactions or require licensing. Similarly, state corporation
and antitrust laws are not pre-empted so long as such laws are consistent with
the intent of the Financial Modernization Act permitting affiliations.
STREAMLINING SUPERVISION OF BANK HOLDING COMPANIES. The GLB Act
authorizes the FRB to examine each holding company and its subsidiaries. The
legislation provides that the FRB may require a bank holding company or any
subsidiary to submit reports regarding: financial condition; monitoring of
financial and operating risks; transactions with depository institutions; and
compliance with the BHCA and other laws that the FRB has jurisdiction to
enforce.
The FRB, however, is directed to use existing examination reports
prepared by functional regulators of the particular activity, publicly reported
information and reports filed with other agencies to the fullest extent
possible.
The FRB may only directly examine subsidiaries that are functionally
regulated by other federal or state agencies if it:
- has a reasonable basis to believe that the subsidiary is engaged in
activities that pose a material risk to an affiliated depository
institution;
- reasonably believes, after reviewing the relevant reports, that
examining the subsidiary is necessary to adequately provide information
regarding its risk monitoring systems; or
- has a reasonable basis to believe that the subsidiary is not in
compliance with the BHCA or other federal law that the FRB has specific
authority to enforce, and the FRB cannot make the determination through
an examination of an affiliated depository institution or the holding
company.
The FRB is not authorized to mandate capital requirements for any
subsidiary that is functionally regulated by another agency and which is in
compliance with the capital requirements prescribed by another federal or state
regulatory authority. Insurance and securities activities conducted in regulated
entities are subject to functional regulation by relevant state insurance
authorities and the Securities and Exchange Commission (the "SEC"),
respectively.
Also, the FRB cannot force a broker-dealer or insurance company that
is a bank holding company to contribute additional capital to a depository
institution, if the company's functional regulator determines, in writing, that
the contribution would have a material adverse effect on the broker-dealer or
insurance holding company. If a functional regulator, however, makes such a
determination, the FRB has authority to require the bank holding company to
divest its interests in the depository institution. The limitations on the FRB
also apply to all federal banking agencies. Thus, the OCC which regulates
national banks, the OTS, which regulates federal savings banks, and the FDIC
will not be able to assume and duplicate the function of being the general
supervisory authority over functionally regulated subsidiaries of banks.
However, the GLB Act specifically preserves the FDIC's authority to examine a
functionally regulated affiliate of an insured depository institution, if it is
necessary to protect the deposit insurance fund.
12
<PAGE>
The GLB Act also specifically limits the FRB's ability to take
indirect action against functionally regulated affiliates. Consequently, the FRB
may not promulgate rules, adopt restrictions, safeguards or any other
requirement affecting a functionally regulated affiliate unless:
- the action is necessary to address a "material risk" to the safety and
soundness of a depository institution affiliate or to the domestic or
international payments system; and
- it is not possible to guard against that material risk through
requirements imposed upon the depository institution directly.
FINANCIAL SUBSIDIARIES OF NATIONAL BANKS. In addition to the
permissible statutory subsidiaries (agricultural credit corporations, bank
service companies and community development corporations, etc.) and operating
subsidiaries (subsidiaries engaged in activities that a national bank itself can
perform), the GLB Act permits national banks to establish and operate a third
class of subsidiary known as a financial subsidiary. A financial subsidiary is a
subsidiary that performs financial activities that a national bank either cannot
otherwise perform itself, or that a national bank cannot otherwise own if not
for the enabling provisions of GLB Act.
Financial activities for national banks are essentially the same as
those for FHCs. Thus, national banks, through financial subsidiaries, are
permitted to engage in the enumerated financial activities authorized by the GLB
Act. However, the following activities, although permissible for FHCs, are
prohibited for financial subsidiaries of national banks and can only be
performed in nonbank subsidiaries of FHCs.
These prohibited activities are:
- insurance or annuity underwriting, except that underwriting title
insurance is permitted for national banks in those states where
state-chartered banks may do so;
- insurance company portfolio investments;
- merchant banking; and
- real estate investment and development activities beyond those directly
authorized by law.
The Secretary, in concert with the FRB, may jointly adopt rules
lifting the insurance underwriting, insurance company portfolio investment, and
merchant banking prohibitions beginning November 12, 2004. Additionally, the
Secretary, in conjunction with the FRB, has the authority to determine whether
additional activities are financial in nature and must follow the same
evaluation criteria that the FRB uses in determining additional financial
activities for FHC purposes.
On January 19, 2000, the OCC issued a proposal to amend Part 5 of its
regulations to provide that a national bank may establish a financial subsidiary
if:
- the national bank and its depository institution affiliates meet the
same "well capitalized," "well managed" and "satisfactory" CRA rating
standards for bank subsidiaries of FHCs;
- the aggregate consolidated financial assets of all of the national
bank's financial subsidiaries does not exceed the lesser of 45% of the
consolidated net assets of the parent bank or $50 billion; and
- a national bank that is one of the nation's 100 largest insured banks,
determined on the basis of consolidated total assets, has at least one
issue of outstanding eligible debt that is rated in one of the three
highest investment grade categories.
The proposed regulations provide for a filing and notification
process. Once expanded activities have commenced in a financial subsidiary, the
proposed regulations require a national bank to comply with certain conditions
in order to ensure that proper safeguards are implemented.
These conditions include, but are not limited to:
- requiring the national bank to deduct the total amount of its investment
in the financial subsidiary from its assets and equity for purposes of
determining regulatory capital, and presenting the information
separately in any published financial statements for the bank;
13
<PAGE>
- prohibiting the consolidation of the financial subsidiary's assets and
liabilities with those of the bank;
- requiring the national bank to establish adequate policies and
procedures to maintain the separate corporate identities of the bank and
its financial subsidiaries; and
- requiring adoption and implementation of policies and procedures to
identify and manage financial and operational risks associated with the
financial subsidiary.
SUBSIDIARIES OF STATE-CHARTERED NONMEMBER BANKS. The GLB Act added
Section 46 to the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (the "FDI Act") which permits
state nonmember banks to hold interests in a subsidiary that are essentially
equivalent to a national bank's financial subsidiary. Additionally, the state
nonmember bank must comply with substantially all of the requirements and
conditions imposed on national banks in order to qualify and maintain their
investments in financial subsidiaries established under the GLB Act, except that
there is no requirement that the state nonmember bank be "well managed."
However, the FDI Act requires the FDIC's consent to an investment in any
financial subsidiary of a state-chartered institution. (See - 5. Expanded
Enforcement Powers - Activities of State Banks herein.)
BROKER-DEALER ACTIVITIES. The GLB Act provides for the functional
regulation of bank securities activities by the SEC. The GLB Act replaces the
broad bank exemption from broker-dealer regulation under the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934 ( the "'34 Act"). The amendments include certain previously excluded
activities within the definition of "broker" and "dealer," thereby subjecting
those activities to the registration requirements and regulation of the '34 Act,
with an exception for certain activities in which banks have traditionally
engaged. These exemptions relate to:
- third-party networking arrangements;
- trustee and fiduciary activities if the bank: (i) is chiefly compensated
by means of administration and certain other fees; and (ii) does not
publicly solicit brokerage deposits; and
- identified banking products such as commercial paper, bankers'
acceptances, employee and shareholder benefit plans, sweep accounts,
affiliate transactions, private placements, safekeeping and custody
services, asset-backed securities, derivatives and other identified
banking products.
The GLB Act also amends the Investment Company Act and the Investment
Advisers Act, subjecting banks that advise mutual funds to the same regulatory
scheme as other advisers to mutual funds. It also requires banks to make
additional disclosures when a fund is sold or advised by a bank.
INSURANCE ACTIVITIES. In addition to affirming that states are the
functional regulators of insurance activities, the GLB Act prohibits
federally-chartered banks from engaging in any activity involving the
underwriting and sale of title insurance. National banks may, however, sell
title insurance products in any state in which state-chartered banks are
permitted to do so, so long as those activities are undertaken in the same
manner, to the same extent, and under the same restrictions that apply to
state-chartered banks.
The GLB Act requires the federal bank regulatory agencies and state
insurance regulators to coordinate efforts to supervise companies that control
both depository institutions and entities engaged in the insurance business, and
to share supervisory information including financial condition and affiliate
transactions on a confidential basis. Federal agencies are further directed to
provide notice to and consult with state regulators before taking actions which
affect any affiliates engaging in insurance activities.
UNITARY SAVINGS AND LOAN HOLDING COMPANY PROVISIONS. The GLB Act
amends the Home Owners' Loan Act (the "HOLA") to prohibit unitary savings and
loan holding companies from engaging in non-financial activities or affiliations
with non-financial organizations. The prohibition applies to applications to
form unitary savings and loan holding companies filed with the OTS after May 4,
1999. Unitary savings and loan holding companies existing or whose applications
were pending on or before May 4, 1999, retain their authority to engage in
nonfinancial activities and affiliations.
The prohibition on non-financial affiliations, however, does not
prevent transactions that involve corporate reorganizations. Specifically, it
does not prohibit transactions that solely involve an acquisition, merger,
consolidation or other type of business combination of a savings and loan
holding company (or any savings association subsidiary) with another company,
where both are under common control.
14
<PAGE>
CONSUMER PRIVACY PROTECTION. The GLB Act enhances financial privacy
laws by imposing an affirmative and continuing obligation to respect the privacy
and protect the confidentiality of nonpublic personal customer information
provided by a consumer to a financial institution, or otherwise obtained by the
financial institution. For purposes of the privacy provisions of the GLB Act, a
financial institution means any entity engaging in the financial activities that
are listed in the new Section 4(k) of the of the BHCA. Thus, the privacy
protections extend to all entities engaged in financial activities defined in
the GLB Act, whether or not they are affiliated with banks or bank holding
companies, FHCs or banks.
The GLB Act also makes it a federal crime to obtain, attempt to
obtain, disclose, cause to be disclosed or attempt to cause to be disclosed
customer information of a financial institution through fraudulent or deceptive
means. These include misrepresenting the identity of the person requesting the
information and misleading an institution or customer into making unwitting
disclosures of confidential information. In addition to criminal sanctions, the
legislation provides for a private right of action and enforcement by state
attorneys general.
FEDERAL HOME LOAN BANK SYSTEM MODERNIZATION. The Federal Home Loan
Bank System Modernization Act of 1999 (the "FHLBSMA") was enacted as part of the
GLB Act. The FHLBSMA reforms the Federal Home Loan Bank System (the "FHLBS") in
several ways. The more significant changes include:
- voluntary rather than mandatory membership of federal savings
associations in the FHLBS;
- permitting all community financial institutions (I.E. institutions whose
deposits are insured by the FDIC and have less than $500 million in
average total assets) to obtain advances from Federal Home Loan Banks;
and
- permitting any community financial institution greater access to FHLBS
credit facilities by expanding the types of assets that may be pledged
as collateral, including small business, agricultural, rural
development, or low-income community development loans.
In addition, a number of restrictions that had applied to FHLBS
member institutions which did not comply with the Qualified Thrift Lender
("QTL") requirements under the HOLA were abolished, including: the Federal Home
Loan Bank stock purchase requirements; the requirement that advances only be
given for housing related purposes; the 30% limit on total advances for non-QTL
members; and certain restrictions that applied to non-QTL thrift institutions.
COMMUNITY REINVESTMENT ACT PROVISIONS. In addition to the maintenance
of at least a "satisfactory" CRA rating in order to qualify for expanded
activities, the GLB Act amends the FDIA to require full disclosure of agreements
entered into between an insured depository institution or its affiliates and
non-governmental entities or persons made under or in connection with
fulfillment of the CRA. These agreements are to be made available to the public
and federal regulatory agencies. Annually, the parties to each CRA agreement are
required to report the use of resources provided to the participating bank's
primary federal regulator.
Other provisions affecting the CRA include:
- reducing the frequency of CRA examinations for banks with less than $250
million in assets to once every five years if they have "outstanding"
CRA ratings, and once every four years if they have "satisfactory"
ratings;
- requiring an FRB study of the default rates, delinquency rates and
profitability of CRA loans; and
- requiring a Treasury study of whether adequate services are being
provided under the CRA.
OTHER PROVISIONS. Other provisions of the GLB Act include, but are
not limited to:
- requiring ATM operators who impose a fee for use of an ATM by a
non-customer to post notice on the ATM and on the screen that a fee will
be charged, the amount of the fee and that no fee will be imposed unless
such notices are made and the customer elects to proceed with the
transaction;
- requiring a General Accounting Office study of possible revisions to the
Internal Revenue Code's Subchapter S corporation rules to permit greater
access by community banks to Subchapter S tax treatment; and
- requiring a General Accounting Office study analyzing the conflict of
interest faced by the FRB between its role as a primary regulator of the
banking industry and its role as a vendor of services to the banking and
financial services industry.
15
<PAGE>
CONCLUSION. The provisions of the GLB Act are numerous and become
effective at various times between the date of enactment and the middle of 2001
and beyond. Additionally, various federal regulatory authorities including the
FRB, OCC, FDIC, OTS and SEC have only started to promulgate the regulations and
interpretations required by the GLB Act. Furthermore, procedures for the
coordination of information among regulators, both state and federal, have yet
to be formulated. Management of the Company and the Bank, therefore, cannot
estimate with any degree of certainty the effect that the GLB Act, future
regulations and future regulatory information sharing will have on the financial
condition, results of operations or future prospects of the Company or the Bank.
Finally, the provisions of the GLB Act, particularly those permitting
affiliations and expansion of activities, may prompt mergers, joint ventures,
partnerships and other affiliations among providers of banking, insurance and
securities services, both domestically and internationally. The extent and
magnitude of these affiliations and their impact on the Company, the Bank or on
the banking industry in general cannot be predicted.
2. INTERSTATE BANKING
The Riegle-Neal Interstate Banking and Branching Efficiency Act of
1994 (the "Riegle-Neal Act") allows banks to open branches across state lines
and also amended the BHCA to make it possible for bank holding companies to buy
out-of-state banks in any state and convert them into interstate branches.
The amendment to the Bank Holding Company Act permits bank holding
companies to acquire banks in other states provided that the acquisition does
not result in the bank holding company controlling more than 10 percent of the
deposits in the United States, or 30 percent of the deposits in the state in
which the bank to be acquired is located. However, the Riegle-Neal Act also
provides that states have the authority to waive the state concentration limit.
Individual states may also require that the bank being acquired be in existence
for up to five years before an out-of-state bank or bank holding company may
acquire it.
The Riegle-Neal Act permits interstate branching through merging of
existing banks, provided that the banks are at least adequately capitalized and
demonstrate good management. The states were also authorized to enact laws to
permit interstate banks to branch DE NOVO. All banks, however, are prohibited
from using the interstate branching authority of the Riegle-Neal Act for the
primary purpose of deposit production or the establishment of deposit production
offices. (See "- 1. Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act - Facilitating Affiliations and
Expansion of Financial Activities" herein.)
The California Interstate Banking and Branching Act of 1995 ("CIBBA")
authorized out-of-state banks to enter California by the acquisition of or
merger with a California bank that has been in existence for at least five
years, unless the California bank is in danger of failing or in certain other
emergency situations, but limits interstate branching into California to
branching by acquisition of an existing bank. CIBBA allows a California state
bank to have agency relationships with affiliated and unaffiliated insured
depository institutions and allows a bank subsidiary of a bank holding company
to act as an agent to receive deposits, renew time deposits, service loans and
receive payments for a depository institution affiliate.
3. FEDERAL DEPOSIT INSURANCE
GENERAL. The Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery, and Enforcement
Act of 1989 ("FIRREA") has resulted in major changes in the regulation of
insured financial institutions, including significant changes in the authority
of government agencies to regulate insured financial institutions.
Under FIRREA, virtually all federal deposit insurance activities were
consolidated under the FDIC, including insuring deposits of federal savings
associations, state chartered savings and loans and other depository
institutions determined to be operated in substantially the same manner as a
savings association. FIRREA established two deposit insurance funds to be
administered by the FDIC. The money in these two funds is separately maintained
and not commingled. The Bank Insurance Fund (the "BIF") insures deposits of
commercial banking institutions and the Savings Association Insurance Fund (the
"SAIF") replaced the deposit insurance fund administered by the Federal Savings
and Loan Insurance Corporation. Insurance of deposits may be terminated by the
FDIC upon a finding that the institution has engaged in unsafe or unsound
practices, is in an unsafe or unsound condition to continue operations or has
violated any applicable law, regulation, rule, order or condition imposed by the
FDIC or the institution's primary regulator.
16
<PAGE>
DEPOSIT INSURANCE ASSESSMENTS. Under FIRREA, the premium assessments
made on banks and savings associations for deposit insurance were initially
increased, with rates set separately for banks and savings associations, subject
to statutory restrictions.
Since 1994, the FDIC has assessed deposit insurance premiums pursuant
to a risk-based assessment system, under which an institution's premium
assessment is based on the probability that the deposit insurance fund will
incur a loss with respect to the institution, the likely amount of such loss,
and the revenue needs of the deposit insurance fund. Under the risk-based
assessment system, BIF member institutions such as the Bank are categorized into
one of three capital categories (well capitalized, adequately capitalized, and
undercapitalized) and one of three categories based on supervisory evaluations
by its primary federal regulator (in the Bank's case, the OCC). The three
supervisory categories are: financially sound with only a few minor weaknesses
(Group A), demonstrates weaknesses that could result in significant
deterioration (Group B), and poses a substantial probability of loss (Group C).
The capital and supervisory group ratings for SAIF institutions are the same as
for BIF institutions. The capital ratios used by the FRB, the FDIC and in the
OCC, to define well-capitalized, adequately capitalized and undercapitalized are
the same as in the prompt corrective action regulations (discussed below). The
BIF and SAIF assessment rates since January 1, 1997 are summarized below;
assessment figures are expressed in terms of cents per $100 in insured deposits.
ASSESSMENT RATES EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1, 1997
------------------------------------------
SUPERVISORY GROUP
-----------------
CAPITAL GROUP GROUP A GROUP B GROUP C
------------- ------- ------- -------
Well Capitalized 0 3 17
Adequately Capitalized 3 10 24
Undercapitalized 10 24 27
Commencing the first quarter of 1997, banks were required to share in
the payment of interest on the Financing Corporation Bonds ("FICO Bonds") issued
in the 1980s to assist in the recovery of the savings and loan industry.
Previously, the FICO debt was paid solely out of the SAIF assessment base.
Prior to January 1, 2000, the FICO assessments imposed on BIF insured
institutions were assessed at a rate equal to 1/5 of the rate of the assessments
imposed on SAIF insured depository institutions. Between the first quarter of
1997 and the fourth quarter of 1999, the quarterly FICO assessment rates for
SAIF insured institutions ranged from a high of $.0650 to a low of $.0582 per
$100 in insured deposits. The BIF assessment rate for the same period ranged
from a high of $.0130 to a low of $.01164 per $100 in insured deposits. The
rates equalized effective January 1, 2000 at $.0212 per $100 in insured
deposits. Although the FICO assessment rates are annual rates, they are subject
to change quarterly. Since the FICO bonds do not mature until the year 2019, it
is conceivable that banks and savings associations will continue to share in the
payment of the interest on the bonds until then.
With certain limited exceptions, FIRREA prohibits a bank from
changing its status as an insured depository institution with the BIF to the
SAIF and prohibits a savings association from changing its status as an insured
depository institution with the SAIF to the BIF, without the prior approval of
the FDIC.
FDIC RECEIVERSHIPS. Pursuant to FIRREA, the FDIC may be appointed
conservator or receiver of any insured bank or savings -------------------
association. In addition, FIRREA authorized the FDIC to appoint itself as sole
conservator or receiver of any insured state bank or savings association for
any, among others, of the following reasons:
- insolvency of such institution;
- substantial dissipation of assets or earnings due to any violation of
law or regulation or any unsafe or unsound practice; o an unsafe or
unsound condition to transact business, including substantially
insufficient capital or otherwise;
- any willful violation of a cease and desist order which has become
final;
- any concealment of books, papers, records or assets of the institution;
- the likelihood that the institution will not be able to meet the demands
of its depositors or pay its obligations in the normal course of
business;
- the incurrence or likely incurrence of losses by the institution that
will deplete all or substantially all of its capital with no reasonable
prospect for the replenishment of the capital without federal
assistance; or
- any violation of any law or regulation, or an unsafe or unsound practice
or condition which is likely to cause insolvency or substantial
dissipation of assets or earnings, or is likely to weaken the condition
of the institution or otherwise seriously prejudice the interest of its
depositors.
17
<PAGE>
As a receiver of any insured depository institution, the FDIC may
liquidate such institution. The liquidation must be done in an orderly manner.
The FDIC may also dispose of any matter concerning the institution that the FDIC
determines to be in the institution's, its depositors' and the FDIC's best
interests. Additionally, the FDIC, as the conservator or receiver, succeeds to
all rights, titles, powers and privileges of the insured institution.
Consequently, the FDIC may take over the assets of and operate an institution
with all the powers of its members, shareholders, directors or officers, and
conduct all business of the institution, collect all obligations and money due
to the institution, and preserve and conserve the assets and property of the
institution.
ENFORCEMENT POWERS. Some of the most significant provisions of FIRREA
were the expansion of regulatory enforcement powers. FIRREA has given the
federal regulatory agencies broader and stronger enforcement authorities
reaching a wider range of persons and entities. Some of those provisions
included those which:
- expanded the category of persons subject to enforcement under the
Federal Deposit Insurance Act;
- expanded the scope of cease and desist orders and provided for the
issuance of temporary cease and desist orders;
- provided for the suspension and removal of wrongdoers on an expanded
basis and on an industry-wide basis;
- prohibited the participation of persons suspended or removed or
convicted of a crime involving dishonesty or breach of trust from
serving in another insured institution;
- required the regulators to publicize all final enforcement orders; and
- provided for extensive increases in the amounts and circumstances for
assessment of civil money penalties, civil and criminal forfeiture and
other civil and criminal fines and penalties.
CRIME CONTROL ACT OF 1990. The Crime Control Act of 1990 further
strengthened the authority of federal regulators to enforce capital
requirements, increased civil and criminal penalties for financial fraud, and
enacted provisions allowing the FDIC to regulate or prohibit certain forms of
golden parachute benefits and indemnification payments to officers and directors
of financial institutions.
4. RISK-BASED CAPITAL GUIDELINES
GENERAL. The federal banking agencies have established minimum
capital standards known as risk-based capital guidelines. The risk-based capital
guidelines include both a new definition of capital and a framework for
calculating the amount of capital that must be maintained against a bank's
assets and off balance sheet items. The amount of capital required to be
maintained is based upon the credit risks associated with a bank's types of
assets and off-balance sheet items. A bank's assets and off-balance sheet items
are classified under several risk categories, with each category assigned a
particular risk weighting from 0% to 100%. A bank's risk-based capital ratio is
calculated by dividing its qualifying capital which is the numerator of the
ratio, by the combined risk weights of its assets and off balance sheet items
which is the denominator of the ratio.
QUALIFYING CAPITAL. A bank's qualifying total capital consists of two
types of capital components: "core capital elements," known as Tier 1 capital
and "supplementary capital elements," known as Tier 2 capital. The Tier 1
component of a bank's qualifying capital must represent at least 50% of
qualifying total capital and may consist of the following items that are defined
as core capital elements:
- common stockholders' equity;
- qualifying noncumulative perpetual preferred stock (including related
surplus); and
- minority interests in the equity accounts of consolidated subsidiaries.
The Tier 2 component of a bank's qualifying total capital may consist of the
following items:
- a portion of allowance for loan and lease losses;
- certain types of perpetual preferred stock and related surplus;
- certain types of hybrid capital instruments and mandatory convertible
debt securities; and
- a portion of term subordinated debt and intermediate-term preferred
stock, including related surplus.
18
<PAGE>
RISK WEIGHTED ASSETS AND OFF BALANCE SHEET ITEMS. Assets and credit
equivalent amounts of off-balance sheet items are assigned to one of several
broad risk classifications, according to the obligor or, if relevant, the
guarantor or the nature of collateral. The aggregate dollar value of the amount
in each risk classification is then multiplied by the risk weight associated
with that classification. The resulting weighted values from each of the risk
classification are added together. This total is the bank's total risk weighted
assets comprising the denominator of the risk-based capital ratio.
Risk weights for off-balance sheet items, such as unfunded loan
commitments, letters of credit and recourse arrangements, are determined by a
two-step process. First, the "credit equivalent amount" of the off-balance sheet
items is determined, in most cases by multiplying the off-balance sheet item by
a credit conversion factor. Second, the credit equivalent amount is treated like
any balance sheet asset and is assigned to the appropriate risk category
according to the obligor or, if relevant, the guarantor or the nature of the
collateral.
MINIMUM CAPITAL STANDARDS. The supervisory standards set forth below
specify minimum capital ratios based primarily on broad risk considerations. The
risk-based ratios do not take explicit account of the quality of individual
asset portfolios or the range of other types of risks to which banks may be
exposed, such as interest rate, liquidity, market or operational risks. For this
reason, banks are generally expected to operate with capital positions above the
minimum ratios.
All banks are required to meet a minimum ratio of qualifying total
capital to risk weighted assets of 8%. At least 4% must be in the form of Tier 1
capital, net of goodwill, and a minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to risk weighted
assets of 4%. The maximum amount of supplementary capital elements that
qualifies as Tier 2 capital is limited to 100% of Tier 1 capital net of
goodwill. In addition, the combined maximum amount of subordinated debt and
intermediate-term preferred stock that qualifies as Tier 2 capital is limited to
50% of Tier 1 capital. The maximum amount of the allowance for loan and lease
losses that qualifies as Tier 2 capital is limited to 1.25% of gross risk
weighted assets. The allowance for loan and lease losses in excess of this limit
may, of course, be maintained, but would not be included in a bank's risk-based
capital calculation.
Federal banking agencies also require all banks to maintain a minimum
amount of Tier 1 capital to total assets, referred to as the leverage ratio. For
a bank rated in the highest of the five categories used by regulators to rate
banks, the minimum leverage ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets is 3%. For
all banks not rated in the highest category, the minimum leverage ratio must be
at least 4% to 5%. These uniform risk-based capital guidelines and leverage
ratios apply across the industry. Regulators, however, have the discretion to
set minimum capital requirements for individual institutions which may be
significantly above the minimum guidelines and ratios.
OTHER FACTORS AFFECTING MINIMUM CAPITAL STANDARDS. The federal
banking agencies have established certain benchmark ratios of loan loss reserves
to be held against classified assets. The benchmark set forth by the policy
statement is the sum of:
- 100% of assets classified loss;
- 50% of assets classified doubtful;
- 15% of assets classified substandard; and
- estimated credit losses on other assets over the upcoming twelve months.
The federal banking agencies have recently revised their risk-based
capital rules to take account of concentrations of credit and the risks of
non-traditional activities. Concentrations of credit refers to situations where
a lender has a relatively large proportion of loans involving a single borrower,
industry, geographic location, collateral or loan type. Non-traditional
activities are considered those that have not customarily been part of the
banking business, but are conducted by a bank as a result of developments in,
for example, technology, financial markets or other additional activities
permitted by law or regulation.
The regulations require institutions with high or inordinate levels
of risk to operate with higher minimum capital standards. The federal banking
agencies also are authorized to review an institution's management of
concentrations of credit risk for adequacy and consistency with safety and
soundness standards regarding internal controls, credit underwriting or other
operational and managerial areas.
19
<PAGE>
Further, the banking agencies recently have adopted modifications to
the risk-based capital rules to include standards for interest rate risk
exposure. Interest rate risk is the exposure of a bank's current and future
earnings and equity capital to adverse movements in interest rates. While
interest rate risk is inherent in a bank's role as financial intermediary, it
introduces volatility to bank earnings and to the economic value of the bank.
The banking agencies have addressed this problem by implementing changes to the
capital standards to include a bank's exposure to declines in the economic value
of its capital due to changes in interest rates as a factor that they will
consider in evaluating an institution's capital adequacy. A bank's interest rate
risk exposure is assessed by its primary federal regulator on an individualized
basis, and it may be required by the regulator to hold additional capital if it
has a significant exposure to interest rate risk or a weak interest rate risk
management process.
The federal banking agencies also limit the amount of deferred tax
assets that are allowable in computing a bank's regulatory capital. Deferred tax
assets that can be realized for taxes paid in prior carryback years and from
future reversals of existing taxable temporary differences are generally not
limited. However, deferred tax assets that can only be realized through future
taxable earnings are limited for regulatory capital purposes to the lesser of:
- the amount that can be realized within one year of the quarter-end
report date; or
- 10% of Tier 1 capital.
The amount of any deferred tax in excess of this limit would be
excluded from Tier 1 capital, total assets and regulatory capital calculations.
5. EXPANDED REGULATORY ENFORCEMENT POWERS
GENERAL. The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of
1991 ("FDICIA") recapitalized the FDIC's Bank Insurance Fund, granted broad
authorization to the FDIC to increase deposit insurance premium assessments and
to borrow from other sources, and continued the expansion of regulatory
enforcement powers, along with many other significant changes.
PROMPT CORRECTIVE ACTION. FDICIA established five categories of bank
capitalization: "well capitalized," "adequately capitalized,"
"undercapitalized," "significantly undercapitalized," and "critically
undercapitalized" and mandated the establishment of a system of "prompt
corrective action" for institutions falling into the lower capital categories.
Under the regulations, a bank shall be deemed to be:
- "well capitalized" if it has a leverage capital ratio of 5.0% or more,
has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 6.0% or more, and has a total
risk-based capital ratio of 10.0% and is not subject to specified
requirements to meet and maintain a specific capital level for any
capital measure;
- "adequately capitalized" if it has a leverage capital ratio of 4.0% or
more (3.0% under certain circumstances), a Tier 1 risk-based capital
ratio of 4.0% or more, and has a total risk-based capital ratio of 8.0%
or more and does not meet the definition of "well capitalized";
- "undercapitalized" if it has a leverage capital ratio that is less than
4.0% (3.0% under certain circumstances), has a Tier 1 risk-based capital
ratio that is less than 4.0%, and has a total risk-based capital ratio
that is less than 8.0%;
- "significantly undercapitalized" if it has a leverage capital ratio that
is less than less than 3.0%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio hat is
less than 3.0%, and has a total risk-based capital ratio that is less
than 6.0%; and
- "critically undercapitalized" if it has a ratio of tangible equity to
total assets that is equal to or less than 2.0%.
Banks are prohibited from paying dividends or management fees to
controlling persons or entities if, after making the payment the bank would be
undercapitalized, that is, the bank fails to meet the required minimum level for
any relevant capital measure. Asset growth and branching restrictions apply to
undercapitalized banks, which are required to submit acceptable capital plans
guaranteed by its holding company, if any. Broad regulatory authority was
granted with respect to significantly undercapitalized banks, including forced
mergers, growth restrictions, ordering new elections for directors, forcing
divestiture by its holding company, if any, requiring management changes, and
prohibiting the payment of bonuses to senior management. Even more severe
restrictions are applicable to critically undercapitalized banks, those with
capital at or less than 2%, including the appointment of a receiver or
conservator after 90 days, even if the bank is still solvent. All of the federal
banking agencies have promulgated substantially similar regulations to implement
this system of prompt corrective action.
20
<PAGE>
Information concerning the Company's and the Bank's capital adequacy
at December 31, 1999 is as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
TO BE WELL
CAPITALIZED UNDER
FOR CAPITAL PROMPT CORRECTIVE
ACTUAL ADEQUACY PURPOSES ACTION PROVISIONS
--------------------------- ------------------------------ -----------------------------
(in thousands) AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
COMPANY
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Leverage $ 14,972 5.21 % $ 11,494 4.00 % $ 14,368 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 14,972 8.97 6,675 4.00 10,013 6.00
Total Risk-Based 17,784 10.66 13,350 8.00 16,688 10.00
BANK
Leverage $ 13,786 4.81 % $ 11,457 4.00 % $ 14,321 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 13,786 8.18 4.00 10,112 6.00
6,741
Total Risk-Based 15,939 9.46 13,482 8.00 16,853 10.00
</TABLE>
The OCC most recently examined the Bank in 1999. As a result of that
examination, the Bank entered into a formal agreement with the OCC on March 22,
2000 (the "Formal Agreement"). Under the Formal Agreement, the Bank is required
to be "well capitalized" by September 30, 2000. The Bank was classified as
"adequately capitalized" as of December 31, 1999. For additional information
concerning the Formal Agreement, see Item 7. Management's Discussion and
Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - "Regulatory
Agreement" herein.
FDICIA and the implementing regulations also provide that a federal
banking agency may, after notice and an opportunity for a hearing, reclassify a
well capitalized institution as adequately capitalized and may require an
adequately capitalized institution or an undercapitalized institution to comply
with supervisory actions as if it were in the next lower category if the
institution is in an unsafe or unsound condition or engaging in an unsafe or
unsound practice. The FDIC may not, however, reclassify a significantly
undercapitalized institution as critically undercapitalized.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS. FDICIA also granted the regulatory agencies
authority to prescribe standards relating to internal controls, credit
underwriting, asset growth and compensation, among others, and required the
regulatory agencies to promulgate regulations prohibiting excessive compensation
or fees. Many regulations have been adopted by the regulatory agencies to
implement these provisions and subsequent legislation (see -"6. Riegle Community
Development and Regulatory Improvement Act of 1994" herein) gave the regulatory
agencies the option of prescribing the safety and soundness standards as
guidelines rather than regulations.
BROKERED DEPOSITS. Effective June 16, 1992, FDICIA placed
restrictions on the ability of banks to obtain brokered deposits or to solicit
and pay interest rates on deposits that are significantly higher than prevailing
rates. FDICIA provides that a bank may not accept, renew or roll over brokered
deposits unless: (i) it is "well capitalized"; or (ii) it is adequately
capitalized and receives a waiver from the FDIC permitting it to accept brokered
deposits paying an interest rate not in excess of 75 basis points over certain
prevailing market rates. FDIC regulations define brokered deposits to include
any deposit obtained, directly or indirectly, from any person engaged in the
business of placing deposits with, or selling interests in deposits of, an
insured depository institution, as well as any deposit obtained by a depository
institution that is not "well capitalized" for regulatory purposes by offering
rates significantly higher (generally more than 75 basis points) than the
prevailing interest rates offered by depository institutions in such
institution's normal market area. In addition to these restrictions on
acceptance of brokered deposits, FDICIA provides that no pass-through deposit
insurance will be provided to employee benefit plan deposits accepted by an
institution which is ineligible to accept brokered deposits under applicable law
and regulations.
21
<PAGE>
LENDING. New regulations were issued in the area of real estate
lending, prescribing standards for extensions of credit that are secured by real
property or made for the purpose of the construction of a building or other
improvement to real estate. In addition, the aggregate of all loans to executive
officers, directors and principal shareholders and related interests may now not
exceed 100% (200% in some circumstances) of the depository institution's
capital.
ACTIVITIES OF OPERATING SUBSIDIARIES. A national banking association
may establish or acquire an operating subsidiary (as opposed to a financial
subsidiary established or acquired pursuant to the GLB Act) to conduct, or may
conduct in an existing operating subsidiary, activities that are part of or
incidental to the business of banking, as determined by the OCC. Such national
banking associations must submit an application to and receive OCC approval
before acquiring or establishing the operating subsidiary, or commencing the new
activity contemplated. National banking associations which are "adequately
capitalized" or "well capitalized" and have not been notified that they are in
"troubled condition" may acquire or establish an operating subsidiary by
providing the OCC with ten (10) days written notice after acquiring or
establishing the operating subsidiary.
After commencing operations, each operating subsidiary is subject to
examination and supervision by the OCC and applicable provisions of federal
banking laws and regulations pertaining to the operations of the parent bank,
shall apply to the operating subsidiary. The OCC has the power to require a
national banking association to divest itself of any operating subsidiary or
terminate any activity conducted by an operating subsidiary that the OCC
determines to pose a threat to the parent bank's financial safety, soundness or
stability.
6. RIEGLE COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND REGULATORY IMPROVEMENT ACT
OF 1994
The Riegle Community Development and Regulatory Improvement Act of
1994 (the "1994 Act") provides for funding for the establishment of a Community
Development Financial Institutions Fund (the "Fund"), which provides assistance
to new and existing community development lenders to help to meet the needs of
low- and moderate-income communities and groups. The 1994 Act also mandated
changes to a wide range of banking regulations. These changes included:
- less frequent regulatory examination schedules for small institutions;
- amendments to the money laundering and currency transaction reporting
requirements of the Bank Secrecy Act; and
- amendments to the Truth in Lending Act to provide greater protection for
consumers by reducing discrimination against the disadvantaged.
The "Paperwork Reduction and Regulatory Improvement Act," Title III
of the 1994 Act, required the federal banking agencies to consider the
administrative burdens that new regulations will impose before their adoption
and required a transition period in order to provide adequate time for
compliance. This Act also required the federal banking agencies to work together
to establish uniform regulations and guidelines as well as to work together to
eliminate duplicative or unnecessary requests for information in connection with
applications or notices. The Paperwork Reduction and Regulatory Improvement Act
also amended the BHCA and Securities Act of 1933 to simplify the formation of
bank holding companies.
7. SAFETY AND SOUNDNESS STANDARDS
In July, 1995, the federal banking agencies adopted uniform
guidelines establishing standards for safety and soundness. The guidelines set
forth operational and managerial standards relating to internal controls,
information systems and internal audit systems, loan documentation, credit
underwriting, interest rate exposure, asset growth and compensation, fees and
benefits and asset quality and earnings. The guidelines establish the safety and
soundness standards that the agencies will use to identify and address problems
at insured depository institutions before capital becomes impaired. If an
institution fails to comply with a safety and soundness standard, the
appropriate federal banking agency may require the institution to submit a
compliance plan. Failure to submit a compliance plan or to implement an accepted
plan may result in enforcement action.
The federal banking agencies issued regulations prescribing uniform
guidelines for real estate lending. The regulations require insured depository
institutions to adopt written policies establishing standards, consistent with
such guidelines, for extensions of credit secured by real estate. The policies
must address loan portfolio management, underwriting standards and loan to value
limits that do not exceed the supervisory limits prescribed by the regulations.
22
<PAGE>
Appraisals for "real estate related financial transactions" must be
conducted by either state certified or state licensed appraisers for
transactions in excess of certain amounts. State certified appraisers are
required for all transactions with a transaction value of $1,000,000 or more;
for all nonresidential transactions valued at $250,000 or more; and for
"complex" 1-4 family residential properties of $250,000 or more. A state
licensed appraiser is required for all other appraisals. However, appraisals
performed in connection with "federally related transactions" must now comply
with the agencies' appraisal standards. Federally related transactions include
the sale, lease, purchase, investment in, or exchange of, real property or
interests in real property, the financing or refinancing of real property, and
the use of real property or interests in real property as security for a loan or
investment, including mortgage-backed securities.
8. CONSUMER PROTECTION LAWS AND REGULATIONS
The bank regulatory agencies are focusing greater attention on
compliance with consumer protection laws and their implementing regulations.
Examination and enforcement have become more intense in nature, and insured
institutions have been advised to carefully monitor compliance with various
consumer protection laws and their implementing regulations. In addition to the
consumer privacy protections enacted pursuant to the GLB Act, banks are subject
to many other federal consumer protection laws and their regulations including,
but not limited to, the Community Reinvestment Act, the Truth in Lending Act
(the "TILA"), the Fair Housing Act (the "FH Act"), the Equal Credit Opportunity
Act (the "ECOA"), the Home Mortgage Disclosure Act ("HMDA"), and the Real Estate
Settlement Procedures Act ("RESPA").
The CRA is intended to encourage insured depository institutions,
while operating safely and soundly, to help meet the credit needs of their
communities. The CRA specifically directs the federal bank regulatory agencies,
in examining insured depository institutions, to assess their record of helping
to meet the credit needs of their entire community, including low- to moderate-
income neighborhoods, consistent with safe and sound banking practices. The CRA
further requires the agencies to take a financial institution's record of
meeting its community credit needs into account when evaluating applications
for, among other things, domestic branches, consummating mergers or
acquisitions, or holding company formations.
The federal banking agencies have adopted regulations which measure a
bank's compliance with its CRA obligations on a performance-based evaluation
system. This system bases CRA ratings on an institution's actual lending service
and investment performance rather than the extent to which the institution
conducts needs assessments, documents community outreach or complies with other
procedural requirements. The ratings range from a high of "outstanding" to a low
of "substantial noncompliance."
The ECOA prohibits discrimination in any credit transaction, whether
for consumer or business purposes, on the basis of race, color, religion,
national origin, sex, marital status, age (except in limited circumstances),
receipt of income from public assistance programs, or good faith exercise of any
rights under the Consumer Credit Protection Act. In March, 1994, the Federal
Interagency Task Force on Fair Lending issued a policy statement on
discrimination in lending. The policy statement describes the three methods that
federal agencies will use to prove discrimination: overt evidence of
discrimination, evidence of disparate treatment and evidence of disparate
impact. This means that if a creditor's actions have had the effect of
discriminating, the creditor may be held liable -- even when there is no intent
to discriminate.
The FH Act regulates may practices, including making it unlawful for
any lender to discriminate in its housing-related lending activities against any
person because of race, color, religion, national origin, sex, handicap, or
familial status. The FH Act is broadly written and has been broadly interpreted
by the courts. A number of lending practices have been found to be, or may be
considered illegal under the FH Act, including some that are not specifically
mentioned in the FH Act itself. Among those practices that have been found to
be, or may be considered illegal under the FH Act are: declining a loan for the
purposes of racial discrimination; making excessively low appraisals of property
based on racial considerations; pressuring, discouraging, or denying
applications for credit on a prohibited basis; using excessively burdensome
qualifications standards for the purpose or with the effect of denying housing
to minority applicants; imposing on minority loan applicants more onerous
interest rates or other terms, conditions or requirements; and; racial steering,
or deliberately guiding potential purchasers to or away from certain areas
because of race.
23
<PAGE>
The TILA is designed to ensure that credit terms are disclosed in a
meaningful way so that consumers may compare credit terms more readily and
knowledgeably. As a result of the TILA, all creditors must use the same credit
terminology and expressions of rates, the annual percentage rate, the finance
charge, the amount financed, the total payments and the payment schedule.
HMDA grew out of public concern over credit shortages in certain
urban neighborhoods. One purpose of HMDA is to provide public information that
will help show whether financial institutions are serving the housing credit
needs of the neighborhoods and communities in which they are located. HMDA also
includes a "fair lending" aspect that requires the collection and disclosure of
data about applicant and borrower characteristics as a way of identifying
possible discriminatory lending patterns and enforcing anti-discrimination
statutes. HMDA requires institutions to report data regarding applications for
one-to-four family loans, home improvement loans, and multifamily loans, as well
as information concerning originations and purchases of such types of loans.
Federal bank regulators rely, in part, upon data provided under HMDA to
determine whether depository institutions engage in discriminatory lending
practices.
RESPA requires lenders to provide borrowers with disclosures
regarding the nature and costs of real estate settlements. Also, RESPA prohibits
certain abusive practices, such as kickbacks, and places limitations on the
amount of escrow accounts.
Violations of these various consumer protection laws and regulations
can result in civil liability to the aggrieved party, regulatory enforcement
including civil money penalties, and even punitive damages.
9. CONCLUSION
As a result of the recent federal legislation, including the GLB Act,
there has been a competitive impact on commercial banking in general and the
business of the Company and the Bank in particular. There has been a lessening
of the historical distinction between the services offered by banks, savings and
loan associations, credit unions, securities dealers, insurance companies, and
other financial institutions. Banks have also experienced increased competition
for deposits and loans which may result in increases in their cost of funds, and
banks have experienced increased overall costs. Further, the federal banking
agencies have increased enforcement authority over banks and their directors and
officers.
Future legislation is also likely to impact the Company's business.
Consumer legislation has been proposed in Congress which may require banks to
offer basic, low-cost, financial services to meet minimum consumer needs.
Further, the regulatory agencies have proposed and may propose a wide range of
regulatory changes, including the calculation of capital adequacy and limiting
business dealings with affiliates. These and other legislative and regulatory
changes may have the impact of increasing the cost of business or otherwise
impacting the earnings of financial institutions. However, the degree, timing
and full extent of the impact of these proposals cannot be predicted. Management
of the Company and the Bank cannot predict what other legislation might be
enacted or what other regulations might be adopted or the effects thereof.
The foregoing summary of the relevant laws, rules and regulations
governing banks and bank holding companies do not purport to be a complete
summary of all applicable laws, rules and regulations governing banks and bank
holding companies.
IMPACT OF MONETARY POLICIES
- ---------------------------
Banking is a business which depends on rate differentials. In
general, the difference between the interest rate paid by the Bank on its
deposits and its other borrowings and the interest rate earned by the Bank on
loans, securities and other interest-earning assets will comprise the major
source of the Company's earnings. These rates are highly sensitive to many
factors which are beyond the Company's and the Bank's control and, accordingly,
the earnings and growth of the Bank are subject to the influence of economic
conditions generally, both domestic and foreign, including inflation, recession,
and unemployment; and also to the influence of monetary and fiscal policies of
the United States and its agencies, particularly the FRB. The FRB implements
national monetary policy, such as seeking to curb inflation and combat
recession, by its open-market dealings in United States government securities,
by adjusting the required level of reserves for financial institutions subject
to reserve requirements, by placing limitations upon savings and time deposit
interest rates, and through adjustments to the discount rate applicable to
borrowings by banks which are members of the Federal Reserve System.
24
<PAGE>
The actions of the FRB in these areas influence the growth of bank
loans, investments, and deposits and also affect interest rates. The nature and
timing of any future changes in such policies and their impact on the Company or
the Bank cannot be predicted; however, depending on the degree to which the
Bank's interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities are rate
sensitive, increases in rates would have the temporary effect of increasing
their net interest margin, while decreases in interest rates would have the
opposite effect.
In addition, adverse economic conditions could make a higher
provision for loan losses more prudent and could cause higher loan charge-offs,
thus adversely affecting the Company's net income.
RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
During 1998, the Financial Accounting Standard Board (FASB) issued
Statement of Financial Accounting Standard ("SFAS") No. 133, "Accounting For
Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities" (SFAS 133 establishes accounting
and reporting standards for derivative instruments, including certain derivative
instruments embedded in other contracts (collectively referred to as
derivatives) and for hedging activities. During 1999, the FASB issued Statement
of Financial Accounting Standard ("SFAS") No. 137, "Accounting for Derivative
Instruments and Hedging Activities - Deferral of Effective Date of SFAS 133 and
Amendment to SFAS 133", which amends certain provisions of SFAS 133 and extends
the initial effective date.
It requires that an entity recognize all derivatives as either assets
or liabilities in the statement of financial position and measure those
instruments at fair value. If certain conditions are met, a derivative may be
specifically designated as (a) a hedge of the exposure to changes in the fair
value of a recognized asset or liability or an unrecognized firm commitment, (b)
a hedge of the exposure to variable cash flows of a forecasted transaction, or
(c) a hedge of the foreign currency exposure of a net investment in a foreign
operation, and unrecognized firm commitment, an available for sale security, or
a foreign-currency-denominated forecasted transaction.
Under these statements, an entity that elects to apply hedge
accounting is required to establish at the inception of the hedge the method it
will use for assessing the effectiveness of the hedging derivative and the
measurement approach for determining the ineffective aspect of the hedge. Those
methods must be consistent with the entity's approach to managing risk. These
statements are effective for the Company on July 1, 2001. Management is in the
process of determining what effect, if any, adoption of this statement will have
on the financial position or results of operations of the Company.
In October 1998, FASB issued SFAS No. 134,"Accounting for
Mortgage-Backed Securities Retained after the Securitization of Mortgage Loans
Held for Sale by a Mortgage Banking Enterprise, an amendment of FASB Statement
No 65." Under SFAS 134. After the securitization of a mortgage loan held for
sale, and retained mortgage-backed securities shall be classified in accordance
with the provisions of Statement 115. However, a mortgage banking enterprise
must classify as trading any retained mortgage-backed securities that it commits
to sell before or during the securitization process. SFAS 134 is effective for
the first quarter beginning after December 15, 1998 and enterprises may
reclassify mortgage-backed securities and other beneficial interests retained
after the securitization of mortgage loans held for sale from the trading
category, except for those with sales commitments in place when the Statement is
initially applied. The adoption of this statement did not have a significant
impact on the financial position or results of operations of the Company.
(During 1999, the FASB issued SFAS No. 135, Rescission of SFAS No. 75 and
Technical Corrections, SFAS No. 136, "Transfer of Assets to a Not-For-Profit
Organization or Charitable Trust that Raises or Holds Contributions for Others."
Management does not believe either of these statements will have a significant
impact on the financial position or results of operations of the Company).
EMPLOYEES
As of December 31, 1999, the Company had no full-time salaried
employees. All compensation of the Company's executive officers was paid by the
Bank, with a portion of such compensation reimbursed by the Company. The Bank
employed 123 full-time equivalent employees as of December 31, 1999.
25
<PAGE>
FACTORS THAT MAY AFFECT FUTURE RESULTS
Discussion and analysis of certain matters contained in our Annual Report
and this Form 10-K may constitute forward-looking statements within the meaning
of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 (the "Reform Act") and
as such, may involve risks and uncertainties. These forward-looking statements
relate to, among other things, expectations of the business environment in which
the Company operates, projections of future performance, perceived opportunities
in the market and statements regarding the Company's mission and vision. The
Company's actual results, performance or achievements may differ significantly
from the results, performance, or achievements expressed or implied in such
forward-looking statements. Consequently, no forward-looking statement can be
guaranteed.
The following is a discussion of certain factors which may affect the
Company's financial results and operations, and should be considered in
evaluating the Company.
CREDIT QUALITY A significant source of risk arises from the possibility that
losses will be sustained because borrowers, guarantors and related parties may
fail to perform in accordance with the terms of their loans. The Company has
adopted underwriting and credit monitoring procedures and credit policies,
including the establishment and review of the allowance for credit losses, that
management believes are appropriate to minimize this risk by assessing the
likelihood of nonperformance, tracking loan performance and diversifying the
Company's credit portfolio. Such policies and procedures, however, may not
prevent unexpected losses that could materially adversely affect the Company's
results.
ECONOMIC CONDITIONS AND GEOGRAPHIC CONCENTRATION The Company's operations are
concentrated in Southern California. The results of the Company depend largely
upon economic conditions in this area, which have been relatively volatile over
the last several years. While the Southern California economy recently has
exhibited positive economic and employment trends, there is no assurance that
such trends will continue. A deterioration in economic conditions could have
material adverse impact on the quality of the Company's loan portfolio and the
demand for its products and services.
INTEREST RATES The Company anticipates that interest rate levels will rise in
the near future, but if interest rates vary substantially from present levels,
the Company's results may differ materially from the results currently
anticipated. Changes in interest rates will influence the growth of loans,
investments and deposits and affect the rates received on loans and investment
securities and those paid on deposits.
SECTOR RISK Although the risk of non-payment exists with respect to all types of
loans, certain other specific risks are associated with each type of loan. The
primary risks associated with commercial loans, including real estate secured
loans, are the quality of the borrower's management and a number of economic and
other factors, including competition, insufficient capital, changes in laws and
regulations and general changes in the marketplace, which induce business
failures and cause the value of business assets pledged to secure the loan to
depreciate. Although the Company's portfolio concentration in the health care
services industry may expose the Company to risks or adverse developments in
this sector, including any such developments resulting from health care reform,
these risks are partially mitigated by the diversity of clientele within the
market niche. Equity lines of credit, installment loans and other lines of
credit are affected primarily by domestic instability and a variety of factors
that may lead to the borrower's unemployment, including deteriorating economic
conditions in one or more segments of a local or broader economy.
GOVERNMENT REGULATION AND MONETARY POLICY The banking industry is subject to
extensive federal and state supervision and regulation. Significant new laws or
changes in, or repeals of, existing laws may cause the Company's results to
differ materially. Further, federal monetary policy, particularly as implemented
through the Federal Reserve System, significantly affects credit conditions for
the Company, primarily through open market operations in United States
government securities, the discount rate for bank borrowings and bank reserve
requirements, and a material change in these conditions would be likely to have
a material impact on the Company's results.
COMPETITION The banking and financial services business in the Company's market
areas are highly competitive. The increasingly competitive environment is a
result in part of changes in regulation, changes in technology and product
delivery systems, and the accelerating pace of consolidation among financial
services providers. The results of the Company may differ if circumstances
affecting the nature or level of competition change.
OTHER RISKS From time to time, the Company details other risks with respect to
its business and/or financial results in its filings with the Commission.
26
<PAGE>
ITEM 2. PROPERTIES
The principal executive offices of the Company are located in leased
premises at 606 Broadway, Santa Monica, California. The original lease was
signed on February 1, 1982, for a ten-year period with two five-year renewal
options, covering the first floor and basement areas of the two-story building.
On March 23, 1984, the Company renegotiated this lease to include the entire
building and tenant improvements. In addition, both five-year options were
exercised at that time, and one additional five-year option was also granted,
permitting the Company to occupy the premises until January 31, 2007.
The Company acquired its second full-service branch office at 9647
Brighton Way, Beverly Hills, California, on April 30, 1984 and assumed the lease
for 10 years. During 1998, the Company exercised its option to extend the lease,
which otherwise would have expired January 31, 1999, and currently expires
January 31, 2014. The current lease calls for periodic rent adjustments every
five years.
The Company opened its third full-service office on December 1, 1986
at 5525 Etiwanda Street, Tarzana, California. The facility is located in a
medical building known as the Tarzana Clark Medical Center. The lease calls for
periodic rent adjustments and expires on November 30, 2001. The lease contains a
five-year option to renew at the then comparable market rate for similar space.
The Company opened its fourth full-service office on October 15, 1991
at 55 East California Boulevard, Pasadena, California. The facility is located
in close proximity to Huntington Memorial Hospital. The lease calls for periodic
rent adjustments, and expires on October 1, 2001. The lease contains two
five-year renewal options, the second of which adjusts the rent to the then
comparable market rate for similar space.
The Company opened its fifth full-service office also on October 15,
1991, at 10 North 5th Street, Redlands, California. The lease calls for periodic
rent adjustments, and expires on March 31, 2001. The lease contains two
five-year options which continue the periodic rate adjustments.
The Company also leases two additional facilities. The first facility
is a limited service office located at 8600 West 3rd Street, Los Angeles,
California, in conjunction with an automated banking terminal facility. The
second facility, opened during 1992, is located at 9900 Norwalk Boulevard, Santa
Fe Springs, California, and contains the Company's note department and data
processing operations. In January 1994, this facility was granted status as a
full-service branch for the purpose of processing deposits. The lease calls for
periodic rent adjustments and expires on August 31, 2003.
All of the leased properties are suitable to the Company's needs and
all of the leased areas were utilized in 1999.
ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
The Company and its subsidiaries from time to time are party to
various legal actions arising in the ordinary course of business. Management
believes that there is no proceeding, threatened or pending, against the Company
which, if determined adversely, would have a material adverse effect on the
business, financial position or results of operations of the Company or the
Bank.
In a First Amended Complaint filed on July 28, 1999 in KOVNER V. UNUM
LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC., FIRST
PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A., ET.AL., Los Angeles Superior Court Case No. SC 057 401,
Joel W. Kovner, former Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of the
Company and the Bank, alleged that certain disability benefits were terminated
by the Company and/or the Bank in violation of a Separation Agreement dated July
8, 1996 among Mr. Kovner, the Company, the Bank and certain other parties. Mr.
Kovner is requesting damages not yet ascertainable, but allegedly in excess of
$300,000, for lost disability benefits. Mr. Kovner is also proceeding against
UNUM, the disability insurance provider, in administrative proceedings to
recover his alleged lost disability benefits.
27
<PAGE>
ITEM 4. SUBMISSION OF MATTERS TO A VOTE OF SECURITY HOLDERS
The Company did not submit any matters to a vote of its stockholders
during the fourth quarter of 1999.
PART II
ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT'S COMMON EQUITY AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS
MARKET INFORMATION AND HOLDERS
The Company sold its shares of Common Stock on a best-efforts basis
commencing May 12, 1982, at $10.00 per share. The offering was completed in
August 1982, and the stock was traded on NASDAQ until December 1991. Based on
issuance and stock splits, the initial offering price is equivalent to $7.22.
The Company's Common Stock began trading on the American Stock
Exchange on December 3, 1991 under the symbol "MDB." On January 19, 1993, the
Company completed a private offering of 341,775 shares of common stock at a
price of $12.62 per share; 326,550 shares were purchased as of December 31,
1992. On June 23, 1995, the Company declared a 5% stock dividend which was paid
on July 19, 1995. On May 14, 1996, the Company declared a 5% stock dividend
which was paid on June 21, 1996. As of December 31, 1999, the Company estimates
that it had approximately 644 registered shareholders.
The following table sets forth the range of stock price for the
Company's common stock for each of the quarters in the two years ended December
31, 1999.
QUARTER HIGH LOW
------- ---- ---
1st Quarter 1998 $ 19.38 14.38
2nd Quarter 1998 21.69 17.88
3rd Quarter 1998 20.13 13.81
4th Quarter 1998 17.75 13.63
1st Quarter 1999 18.63 16.63
2nd Quarter 1999 19.38 16.33
3rd Quarter 1999 21.63 11.50
4th Quarter 1999 12.37 7.25
The foregoing reflects information available to the Company and does
not necessarily include all trades in the Company's stock during the relevant
period. According to information available to the Company, the closing price of
the Company's common stock on December 31, 1999, was $7.25.
DIVIDENDS
On June 15, 1999, the Company paid a cash dividend of $0.05 per share
to stockholders of record on June 1, 1999. On May 31, 1998 and December 10,
1998, the Board of Directors of the Company paid cash dividends of $0.05 per
share to stockholders of record on May 13, 1998 and November 15, 1998,
respectively.
The power of the board of directors of insured depository
institutions to declare a cash dividend or other distribution with respect to
capital is subject to statutory and regulatory restrictions which limit the
amount available for such distributions depending upon the earnings, financial
condition and cash needs of the institution, as well as general business
conditions. FDICIA prohibits insured depository institutions from paying
management fees to any controlling persons or, with certain limited exceptions,
making capital distributions, including dividends, if after such transaction,
the institution would be undercapitalized.
Regulators also have authority to prohibit a depository institution
from engaging in any business practice which is considered to be unsafe or
unsound, possibly including payment of dividends or other payments under certain
circumstances even if such payments are not expressly prohibited by statute.
In a policy statement adopted in November 1985, the Federal Reserve
Board advised banks and bank holding companies that payment of cash dividends in
excess of current earnings from operations is inappropriate and may be cause for
28
<PAGE>
supervisory action. As a result of this policy, banks and their holding
companies may find it difficult to pay dividends out of retained earnings from
periods prior to the most recent fiscal year or to take advantage of earnings
generated by extraordinary items, such as sales of buildings, other large
assets, or business segments, in order to generate earnings sufficient for the
payment of future dividends.
The Company is a legal entity separate and distinct from its banking
subsidiary, and is not currently intending to engage in any activities other
than acting as a bank holding company. Accordingly, the Company's principal
source of funds, including funds available for payment of cash dividends to
shareholders, will consist of dividends paid and other funds advanced to the
Company by its subsidiary. Statutory and regulatory requirements impose
limitations on the amount of dividends payable by the Bank to the Company and on
extensions of credit by the Bank to the Company. See Item. Business - "Bank
Holding Company Liquidity" and "Limitations on Dividend Payments."
No national bank may, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. Section 56, pay dividends
from its capital (which includes capital stock, retained earnings and surplus
reserves for contingencies); all dividends must be paid out of net earnings then
on hand, after deducting expenses, including losses and bad debts. In addition,
the payment of dividends out of net earnings of a national bank is further
limited by 12 U.S.C. Section 60(a), which provides that until the surplus equals
the amount of capital stock, dividends can only be paid if there has been
transferred to the surplus fund not less than one-tenth of the bank's net
earnings for the preceding half-year in the case of quarterly or semi-annual
dividends. Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. Section 60(b), the approval of the OCC shall be
required if the total of dividends declared by a bank in any calendar year
exceeds the total of its net earnings for that year, less any required transfers
to surplus or to a fund for the retirement of any preferred stock. Due to its
financial condition at December 31, 1999, the Bank cannot now, and for the
foreseeable future, will not be able to pay any dividend to the Company without
the prior approval of the OCC. No assurance can be given that the OCC will grant
a request by the Bank for payment of a dividend.
Section 1551 of the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988
(the "PBCL") provides that the board of directors may authorize a business
corporation to make distributions to shareholders subject to certain
limitations. A distribution to shareholders may not be made if; (i) the
corporation would be unable to pay its debts as they become due in the usual
course of business; or (ii) the total assets of the corporation would be less
than the sum of its total liabilities, plus the amount that would be needed, if
the corporation were to be dissolved, to satisfy the preferential rights upon
dissolution of shareholders whose preferential rights are superior to those
receiving the distribution.
29
<PAGE>
ITEM 6. SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA
The following table presents selected consolidated financial data for
the Company for the five years ended December 31, 1999. The information below is
qualified in its entirety by the detailed information and financial statements
of the Company included elsewhere herein or incorporated by reference and should
be read in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations," "Business" and the Company's Consolidated
Financial Statements and Notes thereto included elsewhere herein.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 1998 1997 1996 1995
---------- ---------- --------- --------- --------
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA: (DOLLARS IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Interest income $ 18,295 $ 16,948 $ 16,709 $ 17,650 $ 20,903
Interest expense 3,413 3,630
3,826 4,850 6,539
Net interest income 14,882 13,318 12,883 14,364
12,800
Provision for loan losses 13,993 406
180 4,136 1,539
Net gain (loss) on sale of securities
Available-for-sale 40 (6)
- (71) 1,018
Other noninterest income 1,812 1,741
1,793 1,515 1,435
Noninterest expense 14,300 12,227 12,125
15,545 12,090
Income tax provision (benefit) (3,199) 990
892 (1,712) 1,182
Net earnings (loss) (8,360) 1,432 2,006
1,479 (3,725)
PER SHARE DATA:
Basic earnings (loss) per share $ (4.15) $ 0.81 $ $ (2.78) $
1.10 1.57
Diluted earnings (loss) per share(4) (4.15) 0.74
0.97 (2.78) 1.28
Book value per share 7.32 12.68
11.69 10.47 13.69
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Total assets $ 273,490 $ 259,701 $ 253,828 $ 264,287 $ 322,165
Loans, net 156,484 115,519 103,900 90,759 98,944
Securities held-to-maturity 18,200 24,081 34,661 48,086
41,433
Securities available-for-sale 45,525 80,891 53,135
54,907 81,951
Total deposits 256,028 230,581 229,464 241,277 297,466
Shareholders' equity 14,868 25,321 15,863 14,042
17,508
PERFORMANCE AND LEVERAGE RATIOS:
Return on average assets (3.13) % 0.57 % 0.61 % (1.38) % 0.64 %
Return on average equity (33.63) 6.41 9.48 (23.89) 12.40
Average equity to average assets 9.30 8.93 6.45 5.78 5.14
Net interest margin1 6.27 6.02 6.04 5.38 5.07
Efficiency ratio2 85.66 81.22 82.62 109.13 71.89
ASSET QUALITY RATIOS:3
Nonperforming loans to total loans 5.17 % 1.15 % 0.83 % 1.63 % 4.18 %
Nonperforming assets:
to total loans 5.17 1.38 1.09 1.93 4.27
to total loans and OREO 5.17 1.38 1.08 1.92 4.26
to total assets 3.08 0.63 0.45 0.68 1.32
Allowance for loan losses:
to total loans 3.61 1.87 1.70 2.42 1.07
to nonperforming loans 69.82 161.88 205.47 148.13 25.64
to nonperforming assets 69.82 134.89 156.83 125.66 25.11
Net charge-offs to average total loans 7.31 0.01 0.65 3.04 1.45
<FN>
1 Ratio of net interest income to average interest-earning assets.
2 Efficiency ratio equals operating expense divided by net interest income and other operating income.
3 Nonperforming loans and nonperforming assets do not include accruing loans 90 days or more past due.
4 No effect has been given to dilutive securities in 1999 and 1996, because the impact is anti-dilutive.
</FN>
</TABLE>
30
<PAGE>
ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS
OF OPERATIONS
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERVIEW
Professional Bancorp, Inc. (the "Company") is the holding company for
First Professional Bank, N.A. (the "Bank"). Since the Bank constitutes
substantially all the business of the Company, references to the Company in this
Item 7 reflect the consolidated activities of the Company and the Bank.
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
Results of Operations is intended to provide a better understanding of the
material changes in trends relating to the financial condition, results of
operations, and liquidity of the Company. The following presentation is prepared
as of the dates and for the periods indicated. This discussion should be read in
conjunction with "Selected Consolidated Financial Data," the Company's
Consolidated Financial Statements and the accompanying Notes included elsewhere
herein.
REGULATORY AGREEMENT
As the Bank's principal regulator, the OCC examines and evaluates the
financial condition, operations and policies and procedures of nationally
chartered banks on a regular basis as part of its legally prescribed oversight
responsibilities. The OCC conducted an examination of the Bank in 1999 and
determined that the Bank required special supervisory attention. To implement
this corrective action, the OCC and the Bank entered into the Formal Agreement
on March 22, 2000.
Pursuant to the Formal Agreement, the Bank is required to: maintain
certain regulatory capital levels; appoint a full time president and a full time
senior lending officer; establish a loan workout department; implement an
overdraft policy; improve the management of the loan portfolio; establish an
independent loan review system; immediately take action to protect the Bank's
interest in criticized assets; establish an organizational structure with clear
lines of authority for the CEO and President; develop a conflict of interest
policy which includes relationships with officers, directors and consultants;
develop a three year strategic plan; develop a profit plan to improve and
sustain earnings and a capital plan to meet and maintain a well capitalized
regulatory requirements. The agreement also establishes a schedule for
compliance and requires additional regulatory reporting by the Bank.
In early November, the Board hired Gene Gaines as Chief Executive
Officer of the Bank; and effective February 1, 2000, Mr. Gaines was also
appointed as the full time President and Chairman of the Board of the Bank and
the Chairman of the Board and the Chief Executive Officer of the Company.
Following that hiring, current management and the Boards of the Company and the
Bank have implemented significant changes to the policies and organization of
the Bank and the Company. In early December 1999, the Bank established a loan
workout department and hired a senior vice president to review, develop and
implement loan workout policies.
On February 15, 2000, the credit administration department revised
and implemented certain policies regarding extensions of credit. On March 1,
2000, the Board revised the Bank's organizational structure to clarify the roles
and responsibilities of the Bank's CEO and its President. On March 6, 2000, the
Board authorized the 30-day notification for termination of the consulting
agreement with Network Health Financial Services, Inc. The Board is considering
other possible future business relationships with one or more of the principal
officers of Network Health, but there is no assurance that such a relationship
will be consummated.
In connection with the Formal Agreement, the Bank is preparing
additional organizational and policy revisions, is hiring a permanent senior
lending officer and is revising and expanding the Bank's loan portfolio
management program. As a further commitment in its Formal Agreement, the Bank is
developing and implementing a three-year strategic plan as well as profit and
capital plans. These efforts are intended to meet the OCC's requirement that the
Bank achieve the "well-capitalized" standard by September 30, 2000.
The Formal Agreement requires the Bank to achieve by September 30,
2000 and to maintain (i) a capital leverage ratio equal to at least 5%, (ii)
Tier 1 capital to risk weighted assets ratio equal to at least 6%, and (iii) a
total capital to risk weighted assets of at least 10%.
31
<PAGE>
The following table sets forth the capital ratios for the Bank, at
December 31, 1999 and the required ratios by September 30, 2000:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
REQUIRED BY THE EXCESS
ACTUAL FORMAL AGREEMENT (DEFICIENCY)
--------------------------------- ---------------------------- ------------------------------
(in thousands) AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
BANK
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Leverage $ 13,786 4.81 % $ 14,321 5.00 % $ (535) (.19) %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 13,786 8.18 10,112 6.00 3,674 2.18
Total Risk-Based 15,939 9.46 16,853 10.00 (914) (.54)
</TABLE>
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
The Company recorded a consolidated net loss of $8.4 million, or
$4.15 loss per share, for the year ended December 31, 1999, compared with net
earnings of $1.4 million, or $0.74 diluted earnings per share for 1998. For the
year ended December 31, 1997, the Company recorded net earnings of $1.5 million
or $0.97 diluted earnings per share. Return on average assets for the periods
ended December 31, 1999, 1998 and 1997 were (3.13%), 0.57% and 0.61%,
respectively. Return on average equity for the period ended December 31, 1999
was (33.63%) compared to 6.41% and 9.48% for the same respective periods in 1998
and 1997.
Total assets increased $13.8 million, or 5.3%, to $273.5 million at
December 31, 1999 from $259.7 million at December 31, 1998. Total cash and cash
equivalents increased $11.4 million, or 35.6% to $43.4 million from $32.0
million at December 31, 1998.
Total investment securities decreased $41.3 million, or 39.3% to
$63.7 million at December 31, 1999 compared to $105.0 million at December 31,
1998. The decrease in securities was used to fund the growth in the loan
portfolio.
Gross loans increased (net of $10.5 million loans charged-off), $44.7
million, or 37.9%, to $162.6 million at December 31, 1999 compared to $117.9
million at December 31, 1998. Commercial loans increased $30.4 million, or 32.3%
to $124.4 million from $94.0 million at December 31, 1998. Real estate secured
loans increased $15.8 million, or 135.0%, to $27.5 million at December 31, 1999
compared to $11.7 million at December 31, 1998. The increase in loans was funded
primarily through the sale of investment securities.
At December 31, 1999, nonperforming loans totaled $8.4 million, or
5.17%, of total loans compared with $1.4 million or 1.15% of total loans at
December 31, 1998. The allowance for loan losses as a percent of nonperforming
loans was 69.8% at December 31, 1999 compared to 161.9% and 205.5% at December
31, 1998 and 1997, respectively.
The net loss in 1999 was primarily due to increased provisions for
loan losses, increased noninterest expense and was partially offset by an
increase in net interest income. The Company recorded provisions for loan losses
of $14.0 million in 1999 compared to $406,000 and $180,000 in 1998 and 1997,
respectively. The provisions in 1999 were due primarily to $10.5 million of
charged-off loans, increases in nonperforming assets and to identified
weaknesses in a small number of loans of substantial dollar amounts, which may
take an extended period of time to resolve. The growth in the loan portfolio,
changes in the healthcare industry and the increased complexity of the credits
extended to the industry also made increases in the loan loss provisions
prudent.
Total deposits increased $25.4 million, or 11.0%, to $256.0 million
at December 31, 1999 from $230.6 million at December 31, 1998.
Contributing to the net loss for 1999 was an increase in other
operating expense of $2.1 million, or 17.0%, to $14.3 million compared to $12.2
million in 1998. The increase was due primarily to higher staffing levels,
increased legal fees associated with the cancelled merger and loan workout
activities.
32
<PAGE>
NET INTEREST INCOME
The Company's earnings depend primarily on net interest income, which
is the difference between the interest and fees earned on loans and investments
less the interest paid on deposits, borrowings and convertible notes. The
Company's ability to generate profitable levels of net interest income is
largely dependent on its ability to maintain sound asset quality and appropriate
levels of capital and liquidity. The Company's inability to maintain strong
asset quality, capital and liquidity may adversely affect the ability to
accommodate desirable borrowing customers and the ability to attract a
comparatively stable, lower cost of deposits.
Net interest income, when expressed as a percentage of average total
interest earning assets, is referred to as the net interest margin. The
Company's net interest income is affected by the change in the amount and mix of
interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. It is also affected by
changes in yields earned on interest-earning assets and rates paid on deposits
and other borrowed funds. At December 31, 1999, approximately 74% of the Bank's
loan portfolio adjusts with the prime rate.
1999 COMPARED TO 1998
Net interest income increased $1.6 million, or 11.7%, for 1999
compared to 1998. This increase was primarily due to the increase in average
interest earning assets of $16.3 million, or 7.3 %, to $237.4 million for 1999
from $221.1 million in 1998. The average yield on interest earning assets
increased 5 basis point to 7.71% for 1999 from 7.66% for 1998. Average interest
bearing liabilities increased $4.3 million, or 3.2%, to $137.0 million from
$132.7 million for 1998. The average rate paid on interest bearing liabilities
decreased 25 basis points to 2.49% for 1999 from 2.74% for 1998. Average
noninterest demand deposits for 1999 increased $9.9 million, or 10.6%, to $103.2
million from $93.3 million for 1998.
Average federal funds sold decreased $11.7 million, or 35.2%, to
$21.5 million for 1999 from $33.2 million for 1998. The average yield on federal
funds decreased 19 basis points to 5.16% for 1999 from 5.35% for 1998.
Average total investment securities decreased $9.3 million, or 11.1%,
to $74.3 million for 1999 from $83.6 million during 1998. This was due primarily
to the sale of securities during the first quarter of 1999. The average yield on
securities increased slightly to 5.88% for 1999 from 5.85% for 1998.
Average loans increased $37.5 million, or 36.2%, to $141.2 million
for 1999 from $103.7 million for 1998. While the volume of loans increased
substantially, the benefit was partially offset by a decline in the yield on
loans of 86 basis points to 9.04% for 1999 from 9.90% for 1998. The increase in
loans was primarily in commercial and real estate secured loans.
Average convertible notes decreased $2.3 million, or 72.7%, to
$846,000 for 1999 from $3.1 million for 1998. There was a large decrease in the
rate paid to 5.42% for 1999 from 8.29% for 1998. The conversion of notes into
stock reduced interest expense by $207,000 in 1999.
Average securities sold under agreements to repurchase increased to
$2.2 million for 1999 from $54,000 for 1998. These borrowings were used
primarily in the first quarter of 1999 to temporarily fund asset growth.
1998 COMPARED TO 1997
Average interest earning assets increased $7.8 million, or 3.7%, to
$221.1 million from $213.3 million for 1997. While the volume of interest
earning assets increased, the yield on those assets decreased to 7.66% in 1998
from 7.84% for 1997. The net of the volume increase and the yield decrease
resulted in a decrease in net interest income of $435,000, or 3.4%, for 1998
compared to 1997. Average interest bearing liabilities decreased $10.2 million,
or 7.1%, to $132.7 million for 1998 compared to $142.9 million for 1997. The
average rate paid on interest bearing liabilities increased 6 basis points to
2.74% for 1998 from 2.68% for 1997. Average noninterest demand deposits for 1998
increased $11.9 million, or 14.6%, to $93.3 million from $81.4 million for 1997.
33
<PAGE>
Average federal funds sold increased $11.7 million, or 54.4%, to
$33.2 million for 1998 from $21.5 million for 1997. The yield on average funds
decreased 4 basis points to 5.35% for 1998 from 5.39% for 1997.
Average total investment securities decreased $10.5 million, or
11.1%, to $83.6 million for 1998 from $94.1 million during 1997. The Bank used
1998 to restructure the securities portfolio to meet its interest rate risk
goals and continued liquidity needs. The Bank purchased $65.1 million of
investment securities, sold $15.3 million and had $32.0 million of maturities
and principal payments during 1998. The average yield on securities decreased to
5.85% for 1998 from 6.20% for 1997.
Average loans increased $6.5 million, or 6.7%, to $103.7 million for
1998 from $97.2 million for 1997. While the volume of loans increased, this
growth was partially offset by a decrease in the yield on loans of 7 basis
points to 9.90% for 1998 from 9.97% for 1997. The increase in the volume of
loans was primarily in commercial and other lines of credit.
Average convertible notes decreased $2.5 million, or 44.6%, to $3.1
million for 1998 from $5.6 million for 1997. The rate paid on convertible notes
decreased to 8.29% for 1998 from 8.49% for 1997. The conversion of notes into
stock reduced interest expense by $220,000 in 1998. Average securities sold
under agreements to repurchase decreased to $54,000 for 1998 from $274,000 for
1997.
34
<PAGE>
Analysis of Net Interest Income
The following table presents the distribution of average assets,
liabilities and shareholders' equity as well as the total dollar amount of
interest income from average interest-earning assets and resultant yields, and
the dollar amounts of interest expense and average interest-bearing liabilities,
expressed both in dollars and rates for the three years ended December 31:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 1998 1997
------------------------------ --------------------------- ----------------------
AVERAGE YIELD/ AVERAGE YIELD/ AVERAGE YIELD/
(in thousands) BALANCE (2) RATE INTEREST BALANCE(2) RATE INTEREST BALANCE(2) RATE INTEREST
----------- ---- -------- ----------- ---- -------- ---------- ---- --------
Assets
Interest-earning assets:
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Securities $ 74,349 5.88 % $ 4,375 $ 83,600 5.85 % $ 4,890 $ 6.20 % $ 5,834
94,084
Loans(1) 141,153 9.04 12,762 103,718 9.90 10,265 97,197 9.97
9,686
Federal funds sold 21,493 5.16 1,109 33,161 5.35 1,773 21,510 5.39 1,160
Interest-earning deposits - banks 359 13.60 49 634 3.15 20 463 6.26 29
------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------
Total interest-earning assets 237,354 7.71 18,295 221,113 7.66 16,948 213,254 7.84 16,709
------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------
Deferred loan fees (218) (107)
(170)
Allowance for loan losses (3,020) (1,858) (2,157)
Nonearning assets:
Cash and due from banks 24,647 23,390
22,264
Premises and equipment 1,348 1,531
1,658
Accrued interest receivable 2,187 1,188
1,152
Other assets
5,140 4,859 5,951
------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------
Total assets $ 267,438 $ 250,116 $ 241,952
======= ======= =======
Liabilities and shareholders' equity
Interest-bearing liabilities:
Interest-bearing deposits $ 14,073 0.72 % $ 101 $ 14,325 0.94 % $ 134 $ 12,887 0.84 % $ 108
Savings and money market deposits 86,969 2.02 1,758 84,273 2.14 1,800 1.92 1,821
94,755
Time deposits 32,952 4.24 1,399 30,993 4.65 1,440 4.79 1,408
29,377
Convertible notes 846 5.42 46 3,051 8.29 253 8.49
5,572 473
Repurchase agreements 2,166 5.02 109 54 5.56 3 274 5.84 16
------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------
Total interest-bearing 137,006 2.49 3,413 132,696 2.74 3,630 142,865 2.68 3,826
liabilities
------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ------
Noninterest-bearing liabilities:
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits 103,214 93,306 81,379
Other liabilities 2,358 1,779
2,113
Shareholders' equity
24,860 22,335 15,595
------ ------ -------
Total liabilities and shareholders'
equity $ 267,438 250,116 241,952
======= ======= =======
Interest income as a percentage
of average earning assets 7.71 % 7.66 % 7.84 %
Interest expense as a percentage of
average interest-bearing liabilities 2.49 2.74 2.68
Net interest margin and income (3) 6.27 % $14,882 6.02 % $13,318 6.04 % $12,883
======= ====== =======
<FN>
(1) Nonaccrual loans are included in average balance calculations; however,
interest on such loans has been excluded in computing the average yields
for the periods.
(2) Average balances are primarily computed on daily balances during the
period. When such balances are not available, averages are computed on a
monthly basis.
(3) The net interest margin for a period is net interest income divided by
average interest-earning assets.
</FN>
</TABLE>
The Bank's net interest margin and income remains high due to the
continued significance of noninterest- bearing demand deposits relative to total
funding sources. Average noninterest-bearing deposits for 1999 was $103.2
million, or 43.5% of total average deposits, compared to $93.3 million, or 41.9%
of total average deposits for 1998. While these deposits are not interest
bearing, they are not cost free. Courier service expenses are incurred by the
bank and are classified in other operating expense. If courier service were
classified as interest expense, the reported net interest income for 1999, 1998
and 1997 would have been reduced by $676,000, $721,000 and $735,000,
respectively. Similarly, this would create identical reductions in other
noninterest expense. The net interest margins for the years 1999, 1998 and 1997,
would have decreased 28 basis points, 32 basis points and 34 basis points,
respectively.
35
<PAGE>
Analysis of Changes in Net Interest Income
The Company's net interest income is affected by changes in the
amount and mix of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities,
referred to as "volume change." It is also affected by changes in yields earned
on interest-earning assets and interest rates paid on interest-bearing deposits
and other borrowed funds, referred to as a "rate change." The following table
sets forth changes in interest income and interest expense for each major
category of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, and the
amount of change attributable to volume and rate changes for the years
indicated. The changes due to rate and volume have been allocated to rate and
volume in proportion to the relationship between their absolute dollar amounts.
The effects of tax-equivalent yields have not been presented because they were
deemed to be immaterial.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 COMPARED WITH 1998 1998 COMPARED WITH 1997
----------------------- ------------------------
(in thousands) VOLUME RATE TOTAL VOLUME RATE TOTAL
------ ---- ----- ------ ---- -----
Increase (decrease) in interest income:
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Securities $ (549) $ 26 $ (523) $(626) $(318) $(944)
Loans 3,705 (1,189) 2,516 646 (67) 579
Federal funds sold (633) (41) (674) 623 (10) 613
Interest-bearing deposits - banks
(9) 37 28 9 (18) (9)
------- ------- ------- ----- ----- -----
2,514 (1,167) 1,347 652 (413) 239
Increase (decrease) in interest expense:
Interest-bearing demand deposits (2) (30) (32) 13 13 26
Savings and money market deposits 60 (180) (120) (212) 191 (21)
Time deposits 86 (51) 35 78 (46) 32
Convertible notes (183) (24) (207) (209) (11) (220)
Repurchase agreements
118 (11) 107 (12) (1) (13)
------- ------- ------- ----- ----- -----
79 (296) (217) (342) 146 (196)
------- ------- ------- ----- ----- -----
Increase (decrease) in net interest income $ 2,435 $ (871) $ 1,564 $ 994 $(559) 435
======= ======= ======= ===== ===== =====
</TABLE>
A changing interest rate environment may have a significant impact on
the Company's net interest margin as measured against average interest-earning
assets. Management monitors the Company's net interest margin by utilizing an
interest rate simulation model under various interest rate scenarios. This
process quantifies the impact of changes in interest rates on the Company's net
interest margin. Interest rate scenarios are increased and decreased up to 200
basis points in determining the impact on net interest income. These results
provide a basis for repricing loan and deposit products after giving
consideration to such factors as competition, the economic environment and
expected maturities in the loan, investment securities and deposit portfolios.
PROVISION FOR LOAN LOSSES
The provision for loan losses is determined by management based upon
the Company's loan loss experience, the performance of loans in the Company's
portfolio, the quality of loans in the Company's portfolio, evaluation of
collateral for such loans, the economic conditions affecting collectibility of
loans, the prospects and financial condition of the respective borrowers or
guarantors and such other factors which in management's judgment deserve
recognition in the estimation of probable loan losses. In addition, regulatory
agencies, as an integral part of their examination process, periodically review
the Bank's allowance for loan losses. Such agencies may require the Bank to
recognize additions to the allowance or to take charge-offs (reductions in the
allowance) in anticipation of losses.
The Company recorded provisions for loan losses of $14.0 million in
1999 compared to $406,000 and $180,000 in 1998 and 1997, respectively. The
provisions in 1999 were due primarily to $10.5 million of charged-off loans,
increases in non-performing assets and to identified weaknesses in a small
number of loans, of substantial dollar amounts, which may take an extended
period of time to resolve. The growth in the loan portfolio, changes in the
36
<PAGE>
health care industry and the increased complexity of the credits extended to the
industry also made increases in the loan loss provisions prudent. Net
charged-off loans to average outstanding loans increased to 7.31% for 1999,
compared to 0.01% for 1998 and 0.65% for 1997. The allowance for loan losses was
3.61% of total loans as of December 31, 1999, compared to 1.87% and 1.70% of
total loans as of December 31, 1998 and December 31, 1997, respectively. See
"Allowance for Loan Losses" for further information on net charge-offs.
The OCC can direct a national bank to adjust its financial statements
in accordance with its findings. In 1999, the OCC directed the Company to
charge-off $1.5 million in a single loan and record an additional provision for
loan losses for the six months ended June 30, 1999. The Company recorded an
additional $1.0 million provision for loan losses and amended its earnings and
statement of condition and other disclosures to reflect this directive.
OTHER OPERATING INCOME
The following table sets forth information by category of other
operating income for the three years ended December 31, 1999, 1998 and 1997:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Net gains (losses) on sale of securities available-for-sale $ 40 $ (6) $ -
Merchant discount 291 208 273
Mortgage brokering fees 34 163 106
Service charges on deposits 940 918 791
Other income
547 452 623
--- --- ---
Total other operating income: $ 1,852 $ 1,735 $ 1,793
========= ========= =======
</TABLE>
For 1999, other operating income increased $117,000, or 6.8%, to $1.9
million from $1.7 million for 1998. This was primarily due to the gain on sale
of securities, increases in fees from merchant discounts, service charges and
fees for other miscellaneous services, partially offset by the decline in
mortgage brokerage fees. In November 1998, the Bank formed PBMI, a majority
owned subsidiary, with a mortgage broker. Due to a highly competitive
marketplace the subsidiary ceased operation as of January 1, 2000
For 1998, other operating income decreased $57,000, or 3.2%, to $1.7
million from $1.8 million in 1997. The net decrease was due to a decline in both
merchant discount fees and other income, partially offset by increases in
mortgage brokering fees and service charges on deposits.
37
<PAGE>
OTHER OPERATING EXPENSES
For the year ended December 31, 1999, other operating expenses were
$14.3 million, compared to $12.2 million and $12.1 million for the years ended
December 31, 1998 and 1997, respectively. The ratios of operating expenses to
average assets for 1999, 1998 and 1997 were 5.35%, 4.89% and 5.01%,
respectively.
The following table summarizes changes in other operating expenses
for the years ended December 31, 1999, 1998 and 1997.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
INCREASE (DECREASE)
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997 1999/1998 1998/1997
---- ---- ---- --------- ---------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Salaries and employee benefits $ 6,545 $ 5,987 $ $ 558 $ 183
5,804
Occupancy 1,498 1,439 59 (42)
1,481
Legal fees, net of legal settlement 1,068 395 673 501
(106)
Furniture and equipment 828 811 17 (18)
829
Professional services 1,463 1,146 317 (200)
1,346
Strategic planning and investor relations 60 148 (88) (227)
375
FDIC assessment 56 25 31 (2)
27
Office supplies 287 237 50 10
227
Other assessments 176 190 (14) (35)
225
Telephone 298 288 10 15
273
Audit, accounting and examinations 340 189 151 57
132
Postage 145 160 (15) 10
150
Messenger service 55 34 21 (37)
71
Imprinted checks 10 43 (33) (48)
91
Donations 129 94 35 (7)
101
Meetings and business development 211 191 20 28
163
Other
1,131 850 936 281 (86)
----- --- ---- --- ----
Total other operating expenses $ 14,300 $ 12,227 $ 12,125 $ 2,073 $ 102
=========== =========== ========== ======== =========
</TABLE>
Other operating expenses in 1999 increased $2.1 million, or 17.0%, to
$14.3 million from $12.2 million in 1998. The increase was primarily due to
increase in salaries and employee benefits, legal fees and professional
services. The increase in salaries and employee benefits of $558,000, or 9.6%
was primarily due to a higher staffing level, increased insurance. Legal fees
increased $673,000, or 170.4%, to $1.1 million. This increase was primarily due
to increased loan workout activity and to the cancelled merger in 1999. The
increase in professional services was due primarily to the merger activity and
other performance enhancement activities. The increase in audit and accounting
costs were related to the completion of the year end audit and annual report.
The increase in other expenses was due to the write-off of a repossessed asset.
Other operating expenses in 1998 increased $102,000, or 0.8%, to
$12.2 million from $12.1 million in 1997. Excluding a nonrecurring legal
settlement of $600,000 received in December 1997, operating expenses in 1998
actually decreased $498,000 or 3.9%. The decrease in 1998, is primarily the
result of lower costs associated with professional services and strategic
planning and investor relation expenses. In 1997, legal fees were reduced by an
insurance settlement of $600,000 for reimbursement of a portion of legal fees
related to proxy contest in 1996.
The Company and the Bank entered into a Consulting Agreement dated
August 12, 1996 with Network Health Financial Services, Inc. ("NHFS"), a
Delaware corporation for which Melinda McIntyre-Kolpin serves as Chief Executive
Officer and Patti Derry, President. Pursuant to the Consulting Agreement, NHFS
provides consulting services to the Company and the Bank with respect to
personnel matters, operational procedures and client development and retention.
NHFS is paid its actual costs incurred in the performance of its duties under
the Consulting Agreement (including hourly rates for certain specified NHFS
personnel while they are performing consulting services), plus an additional 25%
of such costs.
38
<PAGE>
In addition, the Company and Bank pay flat monthly rates for the
services of Ms. McIntyre-Kolpin and Patti Derry. For 1999, included in other
professional fees, the Company and the Bank paid NHFS $641,000 pursuant to the
consulting agreement compared to $693,000 and $748,000 for 1998 and 1997,
respectively. Either party may terminate the Consulting Agreement by giving 30
day notice to the other party. On March 6, 2000, pursuant to the agreement, the
Company gave a 30 day notice of termination. While it is anticipated that the
professional service expenses will decrease as a result of this termination, the
total cost savings to the company will be partially offset by the cost of
duplicating some of the services provided by NHFS.
INCOME TAXES
The Company accounts for income taxes under SFAS No. 109. Under this
standard, financial statement tax benefits associated with income tax net
operating loss carryforwards ("NOL's") and future tax deductions for expenses
already incurred for financial statement purposes but not yet deducted for tax
return purposes (deferred tax assets) are allowed to be recognized when it is a
more likely than not expectation that such benefits will actually be utilized.
At December 31, 1999, the Company had $3,212,000 of these deferred tax assets
and placed a valuation allowance against 11.5% of the assets.
The Company recorded an income tax provision (benefit) of ($3.2
million), $990,000 and $892,000 in 1999, 1998 and 1997 respectively. The
effective tax rate in these years were 40.8%, 40.9% and 37.6%. For further
information, see Note 7 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
The following table sets forth the Company's consolidated average balances
of each principal category of assets, liabilities and shareholders' equity and
the percentage distribution of these items for each of the past two fiscal years
(dollars in thousands).
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 1998
---- ----
AVERAGE PERCENT AVERAGE PERCENT
ASSETS: BALANCE OF TOTAL BALANCE OF TOTAL
- ------ ------- -------- ------- --------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Cash and due from banks $ 25,006 9.35 % $ 24,024 9.61%
Federal funds sold 21,493 8.04 33,161 13.26
Securities available-for-sale 53,002 19.82 54,228 21.68
Securities held-to-maturity 21,347 7.98 29,372 11.74
Loans, net 137,915 51.57 101,753 40.68
Premises and equipment, net 1,348 .50 1,531 0.61
Accrued interest receivable and other assets 7,327 2.74 6,047 2.42
-------- ----------- ----------- ------------
Total assets $ 267,438 100.00 % $ 250,116 100.00%
======== ======== =========== ============
LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY:
- ------------------------------------
Deposits:
Demand, noninterest-bearing $ 103,214 38.59 % $ 93,306 37.30%
Demand, interest-bearing 14,073 5.26 14,325 5.73
Savings and money market 86,969 32.52 84,273 33.69
Time deposits 32,952 12.32 30,993 12.39
Convertible notes 846 .32 3,051 1.22
Repurchase agreements 2,166 .81 54 0.03
Accrued interest payable and other liabilities 2,358 .88 1,779 0.71
-------- ----------- ----------- ------------
Total liabilities 242,578 90.70 227,781 91.07
Shareholders' equity 24,860 9.30 22,335 8.93
-------- ----------- ----------- ------------
Total liabilities and shareholders' equity $ 267,438 100.00 % $ 250,116 100.00%
========= ======== =========== =============
</TABLE>
39
<PAGE>
The Company's total average assets increased $17.3 million to $267.4
million, or 6.9%, in 1999, from $250.1 million in 1998. The Company's ratio of
average interest-earning assets to average assets was 88.8% for 1999 compared
to 88.4% for 1998. The increase in total average assets primarily occurred in
the loan portfolio. Average gross loans outstanding for the year ended December
31, 1999 increased $37.5 million to $141.2 million, or 36.16%, from $103.7 in
1998.
SECURITIES
The Company's total investment securities decreased $35.4 million, or
43.8% to $63.7 million at December 31, 1999 compared to $105.0 million at
December 31, 1998. This decrease was due primarily to the sales of $27.1 million
of securities during 1999 for a net gain of $40,000. Proceeds from the sales
were primarily used to fund the growth in loans. The Company's average balance
in total investment securities for the year 1999 was $74.3 million, a decrease
of $9.3 million or 11.1% compared to $83.6 million for the year 1998. The yield
on total investment securities was 5.9% and 5.8% for the years 1999 and 1998,
respectively.
The Company's investment securities are classified as either
available-for-sale or held-to-maturity. Securities available-for-sale was $45.5
million at December 31, 1999, a decrease of $35.4 million or 43.8%, compared to
$80.9 million at December 31, 1998. The net unrealized loss on securities
available-for-sale was $2.7 million and $271,000 at December 31, 1999 and 1998,
respectively. Securities held-to-maturity was $18.2 million at December 31,
1999, a decrease of $5.9 million or 24.5%, compared to $24.1 million at December
31, 1998.
The following table sets forth the carrying value of securities
available-for-sale at the dates indicated.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
----------------------------------------------
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
<S> <C> <C> <C>
U.S. Government securities $ - $ - $ 2,004
U.S. Government agency and
mortgage-backed securities 35,469 68,126 34,740
Small Business Administration securities 631 852 1,292
Municipal securities 2,378 2,546 -
Federal reserve bank stock 439 439 439
Collateralized mortgage obligations
6,608 8,928 14,660
----- ----- ------
Total $ 45,525 $ 80,891 $53,135
====== ====== ======
</TABLE>
Total securities available-for-sale for the year ended 1999 decreased
$35.4 million, or 43.7% to $45.5 million from $80.9 million for the year ended
1998. This decrease was due primarily to the sales of $27.1 million of
securities during 1999 at a net gain of $40,000. Proceeds of the sales were used
to fund the growth in loans.
Total securities available-for-sale for the year ended 1998 increased
$27.7 million, or 52.2%, to $80.9 million from $53.1 million for 1997. During
1998, the Bank purchased $65.1 million of investment securities, sold $15.3
million and had $32.0 million of maturities and principal payments during 1998.
40
<PAGE>
The amortized cost and fair value of securities available-for-sale
are as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1999
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
GROSS GROSS
AMORTIZED UNREALIZED UNREALIZED FAIR
(IN THOUSANDS) COST GAIN LOSS VALUE
---- ---- ---- -----
U.S. Government agency and
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
mortgage-backed securities $ 37,393 $ - $ 1,924 $ 35,469
Small Business Administration securities 647 - 16 631
Municipal securities 2,551 - 173 2,378
Federal Reserve Bank Stock 439 - - 439
Collateralized mortgage obligations
7,157 - 549 6,608
------------ ------------ --------- -----------
Total $ 48,187 $ $ 2,662 $ 45,525
============ ============ ========== ===========
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1998
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GROSS GROSS
AMORTIZED UNREALIZED UNREALIZED FAIR
(IN THOUSANDS) COST GAIN LOSS VALUE
---- ---- ---- -----
U.S. Government agency and
Mortgage-backed securities $ 68,487 $ 153 $ 514 $ 68,126
Small Business Administration securities 858 852
1 7
Municipal securities 2,551 3 8 2,546
Federal Reserve Bank Stock 439 - - 439
Collateralized mortgage obligations
9,034 - 106 8,928
----------- ------------ ---------- -----------
Total $ 81,369 157 635 80,891
=========== ============ ========== ===========
</TABLE>
41
<PAGE>
The following table sets forth the maturities of securities
available-for-sale at December 31, 1999 and the weighted average yields of such
securities. Borrowers may have the right to prepay obligations with or without
prepayment penalties. This right may cause actual maturities to differ from the
contractual maturities summarized below. Collateralized mortgage obligations
often have stated maturities of over ten years but are subject to prepayments
which accelerate actual maturities. See Notes 1 and 3 of Notes to Consolidated
Financial Statements for further information about the available-for-sale
portfolio.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
MATURING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AFTER ONE AFTER FIVE
WITHIN THROUGH THROUGH AFTER
ONE YEAR FIVE YEARS TEN YEARS TEN YEARS TOTAL
(in thousands) AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
SECURITIES AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE:
U.S. Government agency and
mortgage-backed securities - - % $ - - % $ - % $ 37,393 6.20 % $ 37,393 6.20%
-
Small Business Administration
securities - - - - 109 6.43 534 7.20 647 6.90
Municipal securities - - - - 1,434 4.14 1,117 4.40 2,551 4.26
Federal Reserve Bank stock 439 6.00 - - - - - - 439 6.00
Collateralized mortgage
obligations - - - - - - 7,157 6.32 7,157 6.32
-------- ---- ---------- ------ --------- -------- ---------- ---- ------- ----
Total 439 6.00% $ - -% $ 1,543 4.48% $ 46,205 6.18% $48,187 6.12%
======== ==== ========= ====== ========= ====== ======= ==== ======= =====
</TABLE>
The following table sets forth the amortized cost of securities held-to-
maturity at the dates indicated.
DECEMBER 31,
------------------------------
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
U.S. Government securities $ 3,032 $ 3,043 $ 3,054
U.S. Government Agency securities 1,750 2,250
3,189
U.S. Government Agency
mortgage-backed securities
13,418 18,788 28,857
------- ------- -------
Total $18,200 $24,081 $35,100
======= ======= =======
The following table sets forth the maturities of securities
held-to-maturity at December 31, 1999 and the weighted average yields of such
securities. Borrowers may have the right to prepay obligations with or without
call or prepayment penalties. This right may cause actual maturities to differ
from the contractual maturities summarized below. Mortgage-backed securities
generally have stated maturities of over ten years but are subject to likely and
substantial prepayments which effectively accelerate actual maturities.
42
<PAGE>
See Notes 1 and 3 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for
further information about the held-to-maturity portfolio.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
MATURING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AFTER ONE AFTER FIVE
WITHIN THROUGH THROUGH AFTER
ONE YEAR FIVE YEARS TEN YEARS TEN YEARS TOTAL
(in thousands) AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD AMOUNT YIELD
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
SECURITIES HELD-TO-MATURITY:
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
U.S. Government securities $ - - % $ 3,032 6.20 % $ - % $ - - % $ 3,032 6.20 %
-
U.S. Government Agency securities 1,750 5.65 - - - - 1,750 5.65
- -
U.S. Government Agency - - - - - - - - - -
mortgage-backed securities
- - 249 6.63 9,141 8.04 4,028 6.28 13,418 7.47
----------- ------ --------- ------ ----- ----- ------- ------ ------ -----
Total $ - - % $ 5,031 6.04 9,141 8.04 % $ 4,028 6.28 18,200 7.09 %
=========== ====== ========= ====== ====== ===== ======= ====== ======= ======
</TABLE>
LOAN PORTFOLIO
The Company focuses its lending activities in three principal areas:
commercial loans, lines of credit and installment loans. Commercial loans
include commercial loans supported by the operating cash flow and secured by the
business assets of the borrower, and to a lesser extent real estate, and
unsecured commercial loans. Lines of credit include equity lines, overdraft
protection lines and other secured, collateralized and unsecured lines of
credit. Installment loans include automobile and boat loans and other loans for
personal and corporate use. The interest rates charged for the loans made by the
Company vary with the degree of risk, the size and maturity of the loan, the
borrowers' depository relationships with the Company, and prevailing market
rates.
The following table sets forth the amounts of loans outstanding by
type of credit extension as of the dates indicated.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
DECEMBER 31,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997 1996 1995
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Commercial $ 124,403 77 % $ 93,952 80 % $ 86,243 82 % $ 73,577 79 % $ 77,012 77
Real estate secured 17 10 10 11 13,241 13
27,538 11,698 10,512 10,079
Equity lines of credit 4,330 2 5,931 5 6 7 6
6,288 6,202 6,070
Other lines of credit 4,689 3 4,817 4 1 2 2
1,524 1,832 1,997
Installment 1,608 1 1,482 1 1 1 2
1,253 1,375 1,625
Lease financing
- - 32 - 37 - 68 - 140 -
------------ --- ---------- --- ------------ --- --------- --- ---------- --
Gross loans 162,568 100 % 117,912 100 % 105,857 100 % 93,133 100 % 100,085 100
Less: allowance for loan losses (5,873) (2,200) (1,802) (2,253) (1,070)
Less: deferred loan fees, net
(211) (193) (155) (121) (71)
------------ ---------- ------------ -------- ----------
Net loans $ 156,484 $ 115,519 $ 103,900 $ 90,759 $ 98,944
============ ========== ============ ======== ==========
Fixed rate $ 42,194 26 % $ 16,784 14 % $ 6,935 7 % $ 7,075 8 % $ $ 11,240 11
Variable rate 120,374 74 101,128 86 98,922 93 86,058 92 88,845 89
------------ --- ---------- --- ------------ --- -------- --- ---------- --
Gross loans $ 162,568 100 % $ 117,912 100 % $ 105,857 100 % 93,133 100 % $ 100,085 100
========== === ======== === ============ === ======== === ========== ===
</TABLE>
There was no category of loans exceeding 10% of total loans which was
not otherwise disclosed as a distinct line item in the above table.
43
<PAGE>
The Company generally seeks to underwrite loans on the basis of
historic, current and pro forma cash flows, and looks to supporting collateral
as a secondary source of repayment in most extensions. In the opinion of
management, the Company's loan policies conform with applicable regulatory
lending standards.
COMMERCIAL LOANS
At December 31, 1999 the Company's commercial loans totaled $124.4
million, or 76.5%, of total loans compared to $94.0 million, or 79.7%, of total
loans at December 31, 1998.
Commercial loans consist primarily of short to medium term financing
for small to medium sized health care-related companies and professionals
located in Southern California. The commercial loans are primarily concentrated
in the same sectors of the medical community from which the Company's deposit
base is drawn and consists of sole medical practitioners, small groups
practices, large single-specialty groups, multi-specialty medical groups and
other outpatient health care service companies. Approximately 77% of total loans
at December 31, 1999 were commercial loans which were unsecured or
collateralized by various business and personal property assets, including
equipment and accounts receivable, contracts, and the proceeds thereof,
including capitation payments. As a matter of policy, the Company's commercial
loan borrowers are required to submit financial statements and other financial
data (for example, accounts receivable agings and enrollment summaries) on a
periodic basis, in conformity with loan policies and procedures and regulatory
guidelines, to loan officers for their review in monitoring the financial
position and cash flow trends of borrowers. Under this policy, management
generally gives a higher level of attention to borrowers failing to submit the
required financial information. Senior lending officers review delinquency
reports, overdrafts, borrowers' payment histories and periodic financial data to
monitor creditworthiness and identify potential problem loans.
REAL ESTATE SECURED LOANS
At December 31, 1999 the Company's real estate secured loans totaled
$27.5, or 16.9% of total loans compared to $11.7 million, or 9.9% of total loans
at December 31, 1998.
Real estate secured loans generally consist of short to medium term
financing to healthcare related companies as well as to borrowers outside the
healthcare industry. These loans include transactions which are underwritten
based on cash flow adequacy, the source of which may be the underlying
business/borrower for commercial purpose loans, or the property's generated cash
flow for real estate purpose transactions such as purchases or refinances.
Generally, the real estate property collateral is viewed as the secondary source
of repayment, however, the underwriting additionally considers other assets and
net worth available to support repayment when recourse is applicable. Loan to
value ratios on commercial loans secured by real estate generally range from 30%
to 80% at origination. Maturities typically range between one to five years and
amortization schedules are usually no longer than 20 years. These loans are
classified by the Company as real estate loans.
EQUITY LINES OF CREDIT
At December 31, 1999 and 1998, equity lines of credit aggregated
approximately $4.3 million, or 2.7% of total loans, and $5.9 million, or 5.0% of
total loans, respectively. Loan-to-appraised value ratios at the loan
origination date generally do not exceed 85% and all such loans have variable
rate structures. A majority of these lines of credit are secured by junior trust
deeds on residential real estate and require monthly principal payments. Equity
lines generally have a five year maturity and are subject to an annual review of
the financial condition of the borrower.
OTHER LINES OF CREDIT
At December 31, 1999 and 1998, other lines of credit aggregated
approximately $4.7 million or 2.9% of total loans, and $4.8 million, or 4.1% of
total loans, respectively. Other lines of credit are generally unsecured and
include overdraft protection facilities and revolving lines of credit. Overdraft
lines are attached to checking accounts to cover short-term shortfalls in cash
flow.
44
<PAGE>
INSTALLMENT LOANS
At December 31, 1999 and 1998, installment loans aggregated
approximately $1.6 million and $1.5 million, respectively. This loan category
primarily includes automobile loans. Loan-to-appraised value ratios at the loan
origination date range up to 100% for automobile installment loans with maturity
and amortization generally up to 60 months.
The following table shows the maturity distribution of the Company's
loans outstanding at December 31, 1999, and is based on the remaining scheduled
repayments of principal, as due within the periods indicated.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
AFTER ONE AFTER
THROUGH THROUGH FIVE
(in thousands) ONE YEAR FIVE YEARS YEARS TOTAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Commercial $ 57,097 $ 60,468 $ 6,838 $ 124,403
Real estate secured 6,862 19,175 1,501 27,538
Equity lines of credit 187 4,143 - 4,330
Other lines of credit 493 2,896 1,300 4,689
Installment
86 1,460 62 1,608
------------ -------------- ---------- ---------
Gross loans $ 64,725 $ 88,142 9,701 162,568
============ =============== ========== ===========
Fixed rate 6,790 32,486 2,918 42,194
Variable rate
57,935 55,656 6,783 120,374
------------ -------------- ---------- ---------
Gross Loan $ 64,725 $ 88,142 $ 9,701 $ 162,568
============ ============== ========== =========
</TABLE>
LOAN COMMITMENTS
In the normal course of business, there are various commitments
outstanding to extend credit that are not reflected in the consolidated
financial statements. These financial instruments include commitments to extend
credit for working capital, tenant improvements, other term purposes and include
standby letters of credit. These instruments involve, to varying degrees,
elements of credit and interest rate risk. The Company's exposure to credit loss
in the event of nonperformance by the other party to commitments to extend
credit and standby letters of credit is represented by the contractual notional
(principal) amount of those instruments. At December 31, 1999 and 1998, the
Company had commitments to extend credit of approximately $46.7 million and
$49.9 million, respectively, and obligations under standby letters of credit of
approximately $5.6 million and $6.5 million, respectively.
Standby letters of credit are commitments issued by the Company to
support the performance of a client to a third party. Those standby letters of
credit are primarily issued to support public and private borrowing
arrangements, including commercial paper, bond financing, lease arrangements and
similar transactions. All such standby letters of credit are extended for a
period of two years or less. In making commitments and issuing letters of
credit, the Company uses credit policies similar to those used in connection
with extension of credit to all customers with creditworthiness evaluated on a
case-by-case basis. The amount of collateral obtained, if deemed necessary by
the Company upon extension of credit, is based on a credit evaluation of the
customer.
Collateral held varies but may include cash, accounts receivable,
inventory, property, plant and equipment, contract, contract rights and
income-producing commercial real estate.
LARGE LOANS
The Bank has 35 client relationships where the total amount of loans
outstanding and available credit from loan commitments exceeds $2.0 million for
any single borrower/relationship. As of December 31, 1999, the Bank had $83.9
million in loans outstanding, representing 51.6% of gross loans, and $21.5
million in credit available to these 35 relationships. At the end of 1999, two
relationships totaling $5.2 million in loans outstanding had $3.3 million which
were on nonaccrual status.
45
<PAGE>
In addition, to the 35 client relationships discussed above, there
were four other large loan relationships which totaled $14.1 million. $10.3
million of these loans were charged off during the year leaving a loan balance
of $3.8 million currently being carried as non-accrual loans.
As of December 31, 1998, the Bank had $47.6 million of loans
outstanding and $17.7 million in credit available to 23 clients where the loan
outstanding and credit available exceeded $2.0 million. At the end of 1998, a
total of $3.0 million of these relationships had $810,000 of loans on
non-accrual status.
As of December 31, 1999, there were four client relationships, with
loans outstanding totaling $14.9 million, that have loan amounts outstanding and
available loan commitments that are in excess of the Bank's current legal
lending limit of $3.3 million and are therefore considered non-conforming as
defined in 12USC84. Regulation prohibits the further extension of credit of any
kind to these borrowers. The aggregate loans of the borrower are "grandfathered"
until any of the borrower's credit facilities mature at which time the Bank must
make every effort to bring the loans into conformity with the reduced lending
limits unless to do so would be inconsistent with safe and sound banking
practices.
Management is focusing its efforts on reducing the concentration and
risk of large loans. These efforts may include selling the entire loan, selling
a portion of the loans to other lending institutions and restructuring the loans
when appropriate. Additionally, the Bank has adopted a house limit, which is
lower than the legal lending limit, for evaluating any future lending
commitments.
NONPERFORMING ASSETS
The table below sets forth information about nonperforming assets,
which includes nonaccrual loans and other real estate owned ("OREO"), and
accruing loans 90 days or more past due and certain ratios:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
DECEMBER 31,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997 1996 1995
---- ---- ---- ---- ----
NONPERFORMING ASSETS: (1)
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Nonperforming loans $ 8,412 $ 1,359 $ 877 $ 1,521 $ 4,173
Other real estate owned (OREO) - - 90
- -
Other repossessed assets
- 272 272 272 -
------- --------- ---------- ------ ---------
Total nonperforming assets $ 8,412 $ 1,631 $ 1,149 $ 1,793 $ 4,263
======= ========= ========== ====== =========
Accruing loans 90 days or more past due $ 2,891 100 17 507 632
======= ========== ========== ======= =========
Nonperforming loans to gross loans(1) 5.17 % 1.15 % 0.83 % 1.63 % 4.18 %
Nonperforming assets(1)
to gross loans 5.17 1.38 1.09 1.93 4.27
to gross loans, OREO and repossessed assets 5.17 1.38 1.08 1.92 4.26
to total assets 3.08 0.63 0.45 0.68 1.32
<FN>
(1) Nonperforming loans and nonperforming assets do not include accruing loans
90 days or more past due where the loan is well secured and in the process
of collection.
</FN>
</TABLE>
ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES
Management's determination of the allowance for loan losses requires
the use of estimates and assumptions related to both actual and inherent risks
in the loan portfolio. Actual results may, however, differ significantly from
such estimates. In connection with the determination of the allowance for loan
losses where real estate secures the loan, management generally obtains
independent appraisals for all properties. Management believes its current
appraisal policy conforms to regulatory guidelines.
An evaluation of the overall quality of the portfolio is performed at
least quarterly by management to determine the level of the allowance for loan
losses. This evaluation takes into consideration the classification of loans and
the application of loss estimates attributable to these classifications.
46
<PAGE>
The Bank classifies loans as pass, watch, special mention,
substandard, doubtful, or loss based on classification criteria believed by
management to be consistent with the criteria applied by regulatory agencies and
consistent with sound banking practices. These classifications and loss
estimates take into consideration all sources of repayment, underlying
collateral, the value of such collateral, current and anticipated economic
conditions, trends, and uncertainties and the historical accuracy of specific
reserves attached to loans with serious perceived weakness. Additionally, the
Bank utilizes "migration analysis" as another means to assist management in
estimating the level of the allowance for loan losses. Migration analysis is a
statistical method which examines historic charge-off and classification trends
prior to charge-off to estimate potential losses inherent in the loan portfolio.
The above processes provide management with a reasonable basis to
estimate the risk both actual and inherent in the portfolio. In addition, the
Bank utilizes a comprehensive program that considers numerous variables, of
which migration is one, to determine the adequacy of the allowance for loan
losses for reserves nonspecific to certain credits. This program is consistent
with methodologies in Banking Circular 201. Among others, consideration is given
to historical and current trends in past due loans, charged-off loans,
nonaccruals, and the nature and mix of the loan portfolio; and local, regional,
industry, and national economic trends in determining loan loss adequacy.
Finally, credit administration, corresponding loan policies and procedures, and
timely problem loan identification are integral to a sound determination of the
allowance for loan losses. Based on information available at December 31, 1999,
management was of the opinion that a $5.9 million allowance for loan losses,
which constitutes 3.6% of total loans, was adequate as an allowance against
probable and estimated losses.
While the bank's policy is to charge-off in the current period those
loans for which a loss is considered probable, there also exists the risk of
future losses which cannot be precisely quantified or attributed to particular
loans. As this risk is continually changing in response to factors beyond the
control of the Bank, such as the state of the economy, management's judgment as
to the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses in future periods, while
approximate, is in part based on a reasonable methodology. In addition, various
regulatory agencies, as an integral part of their examination process, review
the Bank's allowance for loan losses. Such agencies may require the Bank to
record additions or deletions to the allowance based on their judgments of
information available to them at the time of their examination.
47
<PAGE>
The following tables provide a summary of the Bank's allowance for
loan losses and charge-off and recovery activity.
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
-----------------------
(in thousands) 1999 1998
---- ----
Balance at beginning of period $ 2,200 $ 1,802
Provision for loan losses 13,992 406
--------- ---------
16,192 2,208
--------- ---------
Loan charge-offs
Commercial 10,384 208
Other lines of credit 68 61
--------- ---------
Total loan charge-offs 10,452 269
Recoveries on loans previously charged-off (133) (261)
--------- ---------
Net charge-offs 10,319 8
--------- ---------
Balance at end of period $ 5,873 $ 2,200
========= =========
Loans outstanding at end of period $ 162,568 $ 117,912
Average loans outstanding during period 141,153 103,548
Net charge-offs to average loans
outstanding 7.31 % 0.01 %
Allowance for loan losses:
to total loans 3.61 1.87
to nonperforming loans(1) 69.82 161.88
to nonperforming assets(1) 69.82 134.89
(1) Nonperforming loans and nonperforming assets do not include
accruing loans 90 days or more past due.
In 1999, the Company charged-off $10.5 million of loans.
Recoveries for 1999 were $133,000 compared to $261,000 for 1998. In 1998, the
Company charged-off $269,000 of loans.
The following table shows the historical allocation of the Bank's
allowance for loan losses and the percent of loans in each category to gross
loans for the years ended December 31:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 1998 1997 1996 1995
ALLOCATED % OF ALLOCATED % OF ALLOCATED % OF ALLOCATED % OF ALLOCATED % OF
(in thousands) AMOUNT LOANS AMOUNT LOANS AMOUNT LOANS AMOUNT LOANS AMOUNT LOANS
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Commercial $ 3,944 79 % $ 878 80 % $ 683 82 % $ 1,584 79 % $ 711 77 %
Real estate secured 823 17 76 10 104 10 11 13
237 46
Equity lines of credit 94 2 34 5 111 6 7 6
150 118
Other lines of credit 17 1 335 4 43 1 2 2
24 7
Installment 50 1 173 1 177 1 1 2
5 5
Unallocated
945 - 704 - 684 - 253 - 183 -
---- - --- - ---- - ---- - ---- -
$ 5,873 100 % $ 2,200 100 % $ 1,802 100 % $ 2,253 100 % $ 1,070 100 %
======== ===== ======== ==== ========= ===== ========== ===== ========== =====
</TABLE>
48
<PAGE>
The Bank had approximately $8,708,000 in impaired loans as of
December 31, 1999. The carrying value of impaired loans for which there is a
related allowance for loan losses was $414,000, with the amount of specific
allowance for loan losses allocated to these loans of $134,000. There were
$8,294,000 in impaired loans for which there was no related specific allowance
for loan losses. The average recorded investment in impaired loans during 1999
was $4,436,000. Impaired loans at December 31, 1999 included $8,412,000 of
nonaccrual loans.
The Bank had approximately $1,836,000 in impaired loans as of
December 31, 1998. The carrying value of impaired loans for which there is a
related allowance for loan losses was $153,000, with the amount of specific
allowance for loan losses allocated to these loans of $41,000. There were
$1,683,000 in impaired loans for which there was no related specific allowance
for loan losses. The average recorded investment in impaired loans during 1998
was $1,131,000. Impaired loans at December 31, 1998 included $1,359,000 of
nonaccrual loans.
CREDIT MANAGEMENT
Management believes that the objective of sound credit policy is to
extend loans to qualified customers while managing risks which could affect
shareholders' returns. The loan committee, made up of outside members of the
Board of Directors of the Bank and executive management, approve credit policy,
review asset quality, and determine compliance to credit policy and procedure.
Management periodically reviews loan quality and monitors the progress of watch
list loans, some of which may require an action plan for rehabilitation or
refinancing. In addition, credit underwriting guidelines are periodically
reviewed and adjusted to reflect current economic conditions, industry practices
and regulatory guidelines.
In accordance with management's credit administration and regulatory
policy, loans are placed on nonaccrual status when collection of principal or
interest is questionable. Generally, this means that loans are put on nonaccrual
status when interest is 90 days or more past due, unless the loan is well
secured and in the process of collection.
DEPOSITS AND SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS
The Bank attracts deposits primarily from individuals and businesses
related to the health care services industry. The Bank has no brokered deposits
and the Company's current practice is to not purchase brokered deposits. The
Bank has no known foreign deposits. The average daily amount of deposits and
interest rates paid on deposits is summarized below for the year ended December
31:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 1998 1997
------------ ------------- -------------
AVERAGE AVERAGE AVERAGE
(in thousands) BALANCE RATE BALANCE RATE BALANCE RATE
------- ---- ------- ---- ------- ----
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Noninterest-bearing transaction accounts $ 103,214 - % $ 93,306 - % $ - %
81,379
Interest-bearing transaction accounts 14,073 0.72 14,325 0.93 0.84
12,887
Savings and money market accounts 86,969 2.02 84,273 2.14 94,755 1.92
--------- ------- ------- ------- -------- -----
204,256 1.84 191,904 1.96 189,021 1.79
--------- ------- ------- ------- -------- -----
Time deposits:
Less than $100,000 7,033 4.11 8,273 4.64 8,737 4.48
More than $100,000 25,919 4.28 22,721 4.65 20,640 4.93
--------- ------- ------- ------- -------- -----
Total time deposits 32,952 4.24 30,994 4.64 29,377 4.79
--------- ------- ------- ------- -------- -----
Total deposits $ 237,208 1.37 $222,898 1.63 $ 218,398 1.53
========= ======= ======= ======= ======== =====
</TABLE>
Time deposits of $100,000 or more are generally received from the
Bank's medical and professional client base. The impact on the Bank's liquidity
from the potential withdrawal of these deposits is considered in the Bank's
asset/liability management policies, which anticipates the Bank's liquidity
needs through the management of investments, federal funds sold, and/or by
generating additional deposits.
49
<PAGE>
The table below sets forth the remaining maturities of time deposits
of $100,000 or more as of December 31:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Three months or less $ 34,787 $ 17,253 $ 17,792
Over three through six months 1,789 1,990 1,324
Over six through twelve months 1,853 1,080 940
Over twelve months - 100
------------------ ------------------ -----------
Total $ 38,429 $ 20,323 $ 20,156
================== ================= ===========
</TABLE>
In addition to the time deposits of $100,000 or more, a significant
amount of the Bank's deposits are in accounts with balances in excess of
$100,000. At December 31, 1999, there were 401 such deposit accounts with
balances totaling $137,756,000. These accounts are reviewed for purposes of
monitoring the Bank's liquidity. While increased volatility to the Bank's
deposit base may be present in this group of accounts, the investment management
practices of the Bank consider such potential volatility.
The Bank also uses repurchase agreements from time to time as an
additional source of funds. On December 31, 1999 and 1998, there were no
repurchase agreements outstanding.
The following table sets forth certain information with respect to
the Bank's repurchase agreements for the year ended December 31:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Maximum daily amount outstanding $ 25,000 $ 5,000 $ 8,000
Average amount outstanding 2,166 55 274
Average interest rate 5.03 % 5.50 % 5.77 %
</TABLE>
The Bank had no repurchase agreements outstanding at December 31,
1999, 1998, or 1997, respectively.
CAPITAL RESOURCES
The OCC, the Bank's primary regulator, has established minimum
leverage ratio guidelines for national banks. These guidelines provide for a
minimum Tier 1 capital leverage ratio (Tier 1 capital to adjusted average total
assets) of 3.0% for national banks that meet certain specified criteria,
including having the highest regulatory rating. All other national banks will
generally be required to maintain a minimum Tier 1 capital leverage ratio of
3.0% plus an additional cushion of 100 to 200 basis points.
The FRB, as the Company's primary regulator, has similarly
established minimum leverage ratio guidelines for bank holding companies. These
guidelines also provide for a minimum Tier 1 leverage ratio of 3.0% for bank
holding companies that meet certain specified criteria, including having the
highest regulatory rating. All other bank holding companies will generally be
required to maintain a minimum Tier 1 capital leverage ratio of 3.0% plus an
additional cushion of 100 to 200 basis points. The FRB has not advised the
Company of any specific minimum Tier 1 capital leverage ratio applicable to it.
Risk-based capital standards were implemented on December 31, 1992.
Since December 31, 1992, banking organizations have been expected to meet a
minimum ratio for qualifying total capital to risk-weighted assets of 8.0%, 4.0%
of which must be Tier 1 capital. A banking organization's risk-based capital
ratios are obtained by dividing its qualifying capital by its total
risk-adjusted assets and risk-weighted off-balance-sheet items.
The Company completed a $5.75 million convertible note offering in
May 1994. The interest rate is 8.00% to March 2000 at which time the rate resets
at 150 basis points over the 5 year Constant Maturity Treasury Index. The
conversion price of the notes is $12.6984 per share and is scheduled to mature
in March 2004.
50
<PAGE>
Of the proceeds, $3.6 million was invested in First Professional Bank
in order to increase the Bank's regulatory capital ratios and allow the Bank to
grow, within the bounds of safety and soundness. $930,000 of the proceeds were
used to retire the Company's remaining indebtedness as required by a stock
repurchase agreement.
Information concerning the Company's and the Bank's capital adequacy
at December 31, 1999 is as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
TO BE WELL
CAPITALIZED UNDER
FOR CAPITAL PROMPT CORRECTIVE
ACTUAL ADEQUACY PURPOSES ACTION PROVISIONS
---------------------------- ------------------------------ -------------------------------
(in thousands) AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
COMPANY
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Leverage $ 14,972 5.21 % $ 11,494 4.00 % $ 14,368 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 14,972 8.97 6,675 4.00 10,013 6.00
Total Risk-Based 17,784 10.66 13,350 8.00 16,688 10.00
BANK
Leverage $ 13,786 4.81 % $ 11,457 4.00 % $ 14,321 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 13,786 8.18 6,741 4.00 10,112 6.00
Total Risk-Based 15,939 9.46 13,482 8.00 16,853 10.00
</TABLE>
As discussed further under "Formal Agreement," the Bank entered into
the Formal Agreement with the OCC on March 22, 2000, pursuant to which, among
other things, the Bank is required to achieve by September 30, 2000 and there
after maintain (i) a capital leverage ratio equal to at least 5%, (ii) Tier 1
capital to risk weighted assets ratio equal to at least 6% and (iii) a total
capital to risk weighted assets of at least 10%.
The following table sets forth the capital ratios for the bank, at
December 31, 1999 and the required ratios by September 30, 2000:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
REQUIRED BY THE EXCESS
ACTUAL FORMAL AGREEMENT (DEFICIENCY)
---------------------- -------------------------- -------------------------
(in thousands) AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
BANK
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Leverage $ 13,786 4.81 % $ 14,321 5.00 % $ (535) (.19) %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 13,786 8.18 10,112 6.00 3,674 2.18
Total Risk-Based 15,939 9.46 16,853 10.00 (914) (.54)
</TABLE>
WARRANTS
In connection with a private placement of common stock (the "Private
Placement"), the Company issued (i) a warrant to Robert H. Leshner, principal of
the placement agent, to purchase 110,250 shares of Common Stock (the "Leshner
Warrant") and (ii) warrants to each of Andrew E. Haas and Curtis Swindal to
purchase 13,781 shares of Common Stock, each at a purchase price of $12.70 per
share exercisable in full on or after December 31, 1994 and before December 31,
2002. The Company agreed to grant the holders of the shares issued upon exercise
of the warrant ("Warrant Shares") the right, on two occasions during the
five-year period beginning December 31, 1994, to require the Company to register
(the "Demand Registration") the Warrant Shares under the Act. The Company will
pay the expenses of one Demand Registration. Assuming the Demand Registration
could be filed under a Form 3, such expense would be minimal. See Note 8 of
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
51
<PAGE>
Under the terms of the Leshner Warrant, if Joel W. Kovner, former
Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of the Company, dies before
December 31, 2002, then the Company will purchase, at the option of Mr. Leshner,
some or all of the warrants and/or Warrant Shares then owned by Mr. Leshner,
provided that (i) the maximum aggregate purchase price paid by the Company shall
be not more than $1,000,000 and (ii) the funds to purchase such warrants and/or
Warrant Shares shall come solely from the proceeds of the key person insurance
policy on the former executive. Since such life insurance is in excess of the
cash value recognized on the Company's balance sheet, there would be no net
reduction in capital nor any impact on liquidity. Furthermore, if at any time
prior to December 31, 2002, Mr. Leshner wishes to sell some or all of the
warrants and/or Warrant Shares to a third party, Mr. Leshner must offer to sell
such warrants and/or Warrant Shares to the Company on the same terms and
conditions being offered to such third party.
Another term of the Leshner Warrant restricts the Company's ability
to issue certain types of preferred stock which would entitle the holders
thereof to receive dividends or distributions of assets which vary in amount
with the Company's performance.
INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY
An interest rate sensitive asset or liability is one that, within a
defined time period, either matures or can experience an interest rate change.
As interest rate sensitive assets and liabilities have various repricings and
maturities, changes in interest rates may increase or decrease the Bank's net
interest income. This exposure to changes in interest rates is measured among
other methodologies by an institutions "gap," or the difference between interest
rate sensitive assets and interest rate sensitive liabilities within specified
periods of time.
An excess of maturing or repricing assets over maturing or repricing
liabilities during a given period will serve to increase net interest income in
a rising rate environment and decrease net interest income when interest rates
decline. In a rising interest rate environment, the assets will reprice at
current interest rates earlier than the liabilities thus increasing the Bank's
net interest margin. Conversely, when maturing or repricing liabilities exceed
maturing or repricing assets during a given period, a rising interest rate
environment generally will reduce the Bank's net interest margin.
52
<PAGE>
The following table sets forth the distribution of the Bank's
interest rate sensitive assets and liabilities as of December 31, 1999. The
table also sets forth the time period in which assets and liabilities will
mature or reprice in accordance with their contractual terms. Mortgage-backed
securities provide cash flows on a monthly basis; however, this analysis does
not include prepayment assumptions. Prepayment assumptions are utilized in an
interest rate simulation model, which is routinely used by the Bank in
evaluating the impact of changes in interest rates on the Bank's net interest
income.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1999
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AFTER THREE AFTER ONE
NEXT DAY MONTHS YEAR AFTER
THROUGH THREE THROUGH 12 THROUGH FIVE FIVE
(in thousands) IMMEDIATELY MONTHS MONTHS YEARS YEARS TOTAL
----------- ------ ------ ----- ----- -----
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Loans(1) $ 118,592 $ 1,804 $ 6,635 $ 32,619 $ 2,918 $ 162,568
Investment securities - 439 - 5,136 58,149 63,724
Federal funds sold 27,000 - - - - 27,000
Due from banks 697 - - - - 697
-------------- -------- ------------ ------- --------- -------
Total interest-earning assets $ 146,289 $ 2,243 6,635 $ 37,755 $ 61,067 $ 253,989
=============== ============= =========== ======== ========= =======
Interest-bearing transaction
Accounts $ 16,033 - - - - 16,033
Savings accounts 84,783 - - - - 84,783
Time deposits 45,651 - - - - 45,651
Convertible notes - - - - 679 679
-------------- -------- ------------ ------- --------- -------
Total interest-bearing $ 146,467 $ 0 $ 0 $ 0 $ 679 $147,146
=============== ============= =========== ======== ========= =======
liabilities
Interest sensitive Gap $ (178) $ 2,243 $ 6,635 $ 37,755 $ 60,388
Effect of interest rate swaps
edged Gap $ (178) $ 2,243 $ 6,635 $ 37,755 $ 60,388
Hedged Gap as a percentage
of earning assets (.12) % 100 % 100 % 100 % 99 %
Cumulative hedged Gap $ (178) $ 2,065 $ 8,700 $ 46,455 $106,843
Cumulative hedged Gap as a
Percentage of earning assets (.12) % .92 % 1.31 % 1.23 % 1.75 %
<FN>
(1) Nonaccrual loans of $8,412 are included in average balances and rate calculations.
</FN>
</TABLE>
LIQUIDITY
Adequate liquidity and maintenance of an appropriate balance between
interest rate sensitive earning assets and interest rate sensitive liabilities
are the principal imperatives associated with the asset/liability management
function of a financial institution. Liquidity management involves the ability
to meet the cash flow requirements of clients who may be depositors desiring to
withdraw funds or borrowers requiring assurance that sufficient funds will be
available to meet their credit needs. Aside from asset/liability management, the
Bank maintains short-term sources of funds to meet periodic planned and
unplanned increases in loan demand and deposit withdrawals and maturities.
The initial source of liquidity is the excess funds sold daily to
other banks in the form of federal funds. In addition to cash and cash
equivalents, the Bank maintains a large percentage of its assets in investment
securities. These securities include both securities available-for-sale and
securities held-to-maturity. Securities available-for-sale can be sold in
response to liquidity needs or used as collateral under reverse repurchase
agreements. Securities held-to-maturity are available for liquidity needs solely
as collateral for reverse repurchase agreements. The Bank had no reverse
repurchase agreements as of December 31, 1999 and 1998. As evidence of the
Bank's high level of liquidity at December 31, 1999, cash and cash equivalents
totaled $43.4 million, while securities available for reverse repurchase
agreements totaled approximately $63.7 million.
53
<PAGE>
The combined amount of $107.1 million represents approximately 39% of
the Bank's total assets. Management is of the opinion that the existing level of
liquidity and borrowing capacity is sufficient to insulate the Bank against
unforeseen liquidity demands.
On a stand-alone basis, the Company's primary source of liquidity is
dividends from the Bank. Dividends by the Bank to the Company are subject to
regulatory restrictions. Currently, the Company has cash of $432,000. Under
applicable law, the Bank cannot currently, and for the next several years will
probable not be able to, pay dividends to the Company with out the prior
approval of the OCC. No assurance can be given that the OCC will permit the
payment of dividends and the refusal to do so may require the Company to look to
other sources of liquidity such as borrowings or the issuance of various types
of securities. For further information on the Bank's dividend restrictions, see
"Business - Supervision and Regulation - Restrictions on Dividends and Other
Distributions" and Note 11 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
YEAR 2000
The Year 2000 issue presented a very real and significant challenge to the
Company, along with the entire financial services industry. This problem had the
potential to affect a wide range of systems and equipment, including software
and hardware, utilities, communications platforms and devices, and facilities.
The Year 2000 issue is the result of computer programs being written using two
digits rather than four to represent the calendar year. Software so developed
and not corrected could have produced inaccurate or unpredictable results when
dates change in the year 2000. Such occurrences could have had a material
adverse effect on the Company's financial condition, results of operations, or
business as the Company, like most financial organizations, was significantly
subject to the potential Year 2000 issues due to the nature of financial
information.
Management had successfully developed and implemented a Year 2000 Preparedness
Plan. There is no known impact on the Company related to the Year 2000 issue.
The total cost to date of implementing Year 2000 Compliance was $344,000. The
Company will continue to monitor and test systems for each new century date
milestone, including February 29, 2000, March 31, 2000 and October 1, 2000.
54
<PAGE>
ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK
- -------- ----------------------------------------------------------
INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY
The table below provides information about the Bank's derivative
financial instruments and other financial instruments that are sensitive to
changes in interest rates, including interest rate swaps. Investment securities
and loans are presented based upon contractual maturity and related weighted
average interest rates by expected maturity dates. The information is presented
in US dollar equivalents, which is the Bank's reporting currency.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
THERE FAIR
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 AFTER TOTAL VALUE
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----- ----- -----
(U.S. $ EQUIVALENT IN THOUSANDS)
ASSETS (1)
- ----------
SECURITIES
U.S. government securities
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Fixed $ - $ $ 2,020 $ - $ - $ - $3,032 $3,017
1,012
Weighted average interest rate - 6.81% 5.89% - - - 6.20%
U.S. government agency and
Mortgage-backed securities
Fixed - - - 1,750 229 35,581 37,560 35,590
Weighted average interest rate - - - 5.65% 7.07% 6.88% 6.82%
Variable - - - - - 15,000 15,000 14,761
Weighted average interest rate - - - - - 5.71% 5.71%
Municipal securities
Fixed - - - - - 2,551 2,551 2,377
Weighted average interest rate - - - - - 4.27% 4.27%
Small Business Administration securities
Variable - - - - - 647 647 631
Weighted average interest rate - - - - - 6.90% 6.90%
Collateralized mortgage securities
Fixed - - - - - 7,157 7,157 6,608
Weighted average interest rate - - - - - 6.32% 6.32%
Variable - - - - - -
Weighted average interest rate - - - - - - % -
Federal Reserve Bank Stock
Fixed 439 - - - - - 439 439
Weighted average interest rate 6.00% - - - - - 6.00%
LOANS
Fixed 6,790 15,109 4,638 3,695 9,044 2,918 42,194 41,833
Weighted average interest rate 7.73% 5.98% 8.10% 8.02% 8.16% 7.99% 7.33%
Variable 57,935 12,568 10,041 11,519 19,342 8,969 120,374 120,456
Weighted average interest rate 9.85% 9.41% 9.75% 9.64% 9.65% 8.98% 9.67%
</TABLE>
55
<PAGE>
The table below provides information about the Bank's derivative
financial instruments and other financial instruments that are sensitive to
changes in interest rates, including rate interest swaps. Certificates of
deposit and convertible notes are presented based upon contractual maturity and
related weighted average interest rates by expected maturity dates. For interest
rate swaps and caps, the table presents notional amounts and weighted average
interest rates by contractual maturity dates. The information is presented in US
dollar equivalents, which is the Bank's reporting currency.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
THERE FAIR
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 AFTER TOTAL VALUE
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----- ----- -----
(U.S. $ EQUIVALENT IN THOUSANDS)
LIABILITIES (1)
DEPOSITS
<S> <C> <C> <C>` C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Noninterest-bearing transaction accounts $109,560 $ $ $ $ $ $
109,560 109,560
Weighted average interest rate .25% .25%
Interest-bearing transaction accounts 16,033 16,033 16,033
Weighted average interest rate .72% - - - - - .72%
Savings and money market accounts 84,783 - - - - - 84,783 84,783
Weighted average interest rate 2.22% - - - - - 2.22 %
Certificates of deposit and other time deposits
Fixed 45,650 1 - - - - 45,651 45,666
Weighted average interest rate 4.18% 4.25 % - - - - 4.18%
CONVERTIBLE NOTES - - - - - 679 679 679
Weighted average interest rate - - - - - 5.42% 5.42%
OFF-BALANCE SHEET ASSETS
Interest rate swaps - - - - - -
Weighted average interest rate - pay -% - - - - - %
Weighted average interest rate - receive -% - - - - - %
<FN>
(1) The Bank used certain assumptions to estimate fair values and expected
maturities. For loans, expected maturities are contractual maturities adjusted
for estimated prepayments of principal based on market indicators. Investment
securities are at quoted market rates and stated maturities. For loan fair value
computations, the company used a discounted cashflow model with discount rates
based upon prevailing market rates for similar types of loans, incorporating
adjustments for credit risk. For deposit liabilities, fair values were
calculated using discounted cashflow models based on market interest rates for
different product types and maturity dates for which the deposits are held.
</FN>
</TABLE>
EXCHANGE RATE SENSITIVITY
All of the Bank's derivative financial instruments and other
financial instruments are denominated in US dollars. The Company does not have,
or anticipate having, any foreign currency exchange rate exposure.
COMMODITY PRICE SENSITIVITY
The Bank does not have, or anticipate having, any derivative
commodity instruments.
ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
The Company's Financial Statements are provided in response to Item 14(a) below.
56
<PAGE>
ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND
FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The disclosure called for by this Item was previously reported on Forms 8-K
filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on October 8, 1999, October
14, 1999 and January 6, 2000, respectively.
PART III
ITEM 10. DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
------------------
The principal occupations and certain other information about the
current directors of the Company is as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
BUSINESS EXPERIENCE YEAR ELECTED
DURING THE PAST DIRECTOR
NAME AND ADDRESS AGE FIVE YEARS --------
---------------- --- ----------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Richard A. Berger 68 Richard A. Berger & Associates (Real Estate 1982
45-605 Pawnee Road Investments and Brokerage); Realtor, Fred Sands
Indian Wells, CA 92210 Desert Realty (from 1995 until 1999)
Ronald L. Katz, M.D. 67 Chairman and Professor of Anesthesiology, USC Medical 1982
1200 N. State Street Center; Professor (until June, 1995) and Chairman
Suite 14901 (until June, 1990) of Anesthesiology, UCLA Medical
Los Angeles, CA 90033 Center
Gene F. Gaines 59 Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer, February, 2000
606 Broadway Professional Bancorp, Inc. (since February, 2000),
Santa Monica, CA. 90404 President and Chairman of the Board (since February,
2000), and Chief Executive Officer; First
Professional Bank, N.A. (since October, 1999);
formerly Senior Vice President, SunAmerica Retirement
Markets, Inc. (from January 1998 until August 1999);
Senior Vice President, Fidelity and Guaranty Life
Insurance Company (from March 1993 until January 1998)
Robert Margolis, M.D. 54 Managing Partner, CEO and Chairman of the Board, May, 1999
19191 S. Vermont Ave., #200 HealthCare Partners; Chairman of the Board,
Torrance, CA. 90502 California Hospital Medical Center, Los Angeles;
Director, Catholic Healthcare West; Director,
Committee for Quality Assurance; Director, California
HealthCare Association of Southern California
Lynn O. Poulson 62 Secretary, Professional Bancorp, Inc. and First 1982
10880 Wilshire Blvd. Professional Bank, N.A. (since May, 1997); President
Suite 1100 of Johnson, Poulson, Coons & Slater (law firm)
Los Angeles, CA 90024
</TABLE>
Julie P. Thompson, Walter T. Mullikin, M.D. and Terry O. Hartshorn were
directors during the year ended December 31, 1999, but were no longer directors
as of the filing of this Form 10K.
57
<PAGE>
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE COMPANY
The following persons are the executive officers of the Company
and/or the Bank:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
NAME AGE BUSINESS EXPERIENCE DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS
---- --- ----------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C>
Gene F. Gaines 59 Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer, Professional Bancorp, Inc.
(since February, 2000); Chief Executive Officer, (since November, 1999) and
Chairman of the Board and President (since February, 2000), First
Professional Bank, N.A.; formerly Senior Vice President, SunAmerica
Retirement Markets, Inc. (from January 1998 until August 1999); Senior Vice
President, Fidelity and Guaranty Life Insurance Company (from March 1993
until January 1998).
Larry Patapoff 45 Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, Professional Bancorp, Inc.
(since November, 1999); Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer
(since February, 2000) and Chief Financial Officer (since November, 1999),
First Professional Bank, N.A.; formerly Project Manager, DataStudy, Inc. a
technology consulting firm (from January, 1998 to August 1998); formerly a
banking consultant (March, 1996 to December, 1997); formerly Finance
Director, Fidelity Federal Bank (September, 1993 to February,
1996).
Robert Dyck 43 Senior Vice President Credit Administration, First Professional Bank, N.A.,
(since December, 1999); formerly Senior Vice President, Senior Loan Officer,
Santa Monica Bank (April, 1997 to December 1999); Vice President, Credit
Administrator, Sanwa Bank California (September, 1994 to April, 1997).
Sharon A. Schmidt 42 Senior Vice President, Chief Operations Officer (since February, 1998);
5525 Etiwanda Ave., Suite 110 formerly Vice President, Operations Administration, First Professional Bank,
Tarzana, CA 91356 N.A. (September, 1994 to February, 1998).
Jae Souverielle 35 Senior Vice President, Strategic Planning & Development , First Professional
Bank, N.A. (since August 17, 1998); formerly Independent Consultant (May,
1994 to August, 1998); Vice President, Loan & CRA Officer, South Bay Bank
(May, 1989 to May, 1994)
Nancy Ferretti-Foster 40 Senior Vice President, Chief Information Officer (since February, 1998);
9900 Norwalk Blvd., Suite 150 formerly Vice President, Information System, First Professional Bank, N.A.
Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670 (September, 1994 to February, 1998); Co-Owner, Time Traveler Antique Toys
(since October, 1996); Vice President and Secretary, 7-W Investigations, Inc.
(since June, 1997).
</TABLE>
The business address of all executive officers is 606 Broadway, Santa
Monica, California 90401, unless otherwise indicated.
58
<PAGE>
SECTION 16(A) BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP REPORTING COMPLIANCE
Section 16(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 requires the
Company's directors and executive officers, and persons who own more than ten
percent of the Company's Common Stock, to file with the Securities and Exchange
Commission and the American Stock Exchange initial reports of ownership and
reports of changes in ownership of Common Stock of the Company. Officers,
directors and greater than ten percent shareholders are required by SEC
regulation to furnish the Company with copies of all Section 16(a) reports they
file.
To the Company's knowledge, based solely upon review of the copies of
such reports furnished to the Company and written representations that no other
reports were required, during the year ended December 31, 1999, all Section
16(a) filing requirements applicable to its officers, directors and greater than
ten percent beneficial owners were fulfilled in a timely manner.
ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
The following tables list information on compensation received for
services by any person who served as the chief executive officer or functioned
in a similar capacity of the Company or the Bank, and the four highest
compensated executive officers of the Company and/or the Bank for services in
all capacities to the Company and the Bank, during the year ended December 31,
1999.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE
--------------------------
LONG TERM
OTHER COMPENSATION ALL
NAME AND PRINCIPAL POSITION ANNUAL AWARD OTHER
YEAR SALARY BONUS COMPENSATION OPTIONS COMPENSATION
---- ------ ----- ------------ ------- ------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Gene Gaines, Chief Executive Officer and 1999 28,134 -0- 1,000 30,000(18) 9,090(2)
President of the Company and the Bank 1998 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
1997 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
Melinda McIntrye, former
President of the Bank 1999 (3) -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
1998 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
1997 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
Jae Souverielle, Senior Vice President,
Strategic Planning and 1999 109,628 -0- 4,800(4) 3,500(5) 10,800(14)
Development of the Bank 1998 30,627(8) -0- 1,500(7) 71,955(16)
1997 -0- -0- 1,800(6) -0- -0-
-0-
Janet L. Peevey, Former Senior Vice 1999 117,500 6,000(9) -0- -0-
President, Credit Administration of the Bank 1998 95,000 -0- 6,000(9) -0- -0-
1997 28,958(10) -0- -0- -0- -0-
4,000
Sharon A. Schmidt, Senior Vice President and 1999 97,200 4,800(4) 5,000(11) -0-
Chief Operations Officer of the Bank 1998 90,000 -0- 4,800(4) -0- -0-
1997 76,992 -0- 2,000(13) -0- -0-
40,000(12)
Nancy Ferretti-Foster, Senior Vice 1999 97,200 9,720 4,800(4) 5,000(11) -0-
President and Chief Information Officer of the Bank 1998 90,000 -0- 4,800(4) -0- 7,269(17)
1997 76,992 40,000(15) 2,000(13) -0- -0-
Eric J. Woodstrom, Former Acting 1999 112,226 -0- 4,250(9) -0- -0-
Chief Financial Officer of the Company 1998 125,000 -0- 6,000(9) -0- -0-
and Executive Vice President of the Bank 1997 118,903 20,000 6,000(9) -0- -0-
Gary W. Mounce, Former Senior Vice President 1999 110,779 -0- 4,500(9) -0- -0-
and Senior Loan Officer of the Bank 1998 115,000 -0- 6,000(9) -0- -0-
1997 99,999 50,000 6,000(9) -0- -0-
59
<PAGE>
<FN>
1 Reflects a $500 per month car allowance which began in November 1999
2 Represents consulting fees paid prior to when Mr. Gaines became an employee of the Bank.
3 In September, 1996, Ms. McIntyre-Kolpin was made acting President and
a Director of the Bank. Ms. McIntyre-Kolpin is the Chief Executive
Officer and the principal shareholder of Network Health Financial
Services, Inc., a Delaware corporation which receives consulting fees
from the Company and Bank pursuant to the terms of a Consulting
Agreement. Effective March 11, 1997, Bancorp and the Bank paid NHFS a
flat monthly fee of $25,000 for Ms. McIntyre-Kolpin's full-time
services as President of the Bank. Prior to March 11, 1997, Bancorp
and the Bank paid NHFS a flat monthly rate of $19,000 for Ms.
McIntyre-Kolpin's part-time services as acting President of the Bank.
The Company and the Bank gave the required 30-day notice to terminate
the consulting agreement on March 6, 2000. See also, Item 13 -
"Certain Relationships and Related Transactions."
4 Reflects a $400 per month car allowance.
5 Represents stock options for 3,500 shares which were granted in November
1999. 1,100 of which vest on November 1, 1999, 1,200 of which shall vest
on November 1, 2000 and 1,200 of which shall vest on November 1, 2001
provided Ms. Souverielle is employed by the Bank on the vesting date.
6 Reflects a $400 per month car allowance which began in August, 1998.
7 Represents stock options for 1,500 shares which were granted in August 1998.
8 Ms. Souverielle began employment with the Bank on August 17, 1998.
9 Reflects a $500 per month car allowance.
10 Ms Peevey began employment with the Bank on September 15, 1997.
Ms. Peevey's employment with the Bank terminated on January 15, 2000.
11 Represents stock options for 5,000 shares which were granted in
November 1999, 1,666 of which vest on November 1, 1999, 1,667 which
vested on November 1, 2000 and 1,667 of which shall vest on November
1, 2001, provided the applicable employee is still employed by the
Bank on the vesting date.
12 Reflects bonus earned in 1997, $20,000 of which was paid in 1998.
13 Reflects $400 per month car allowance which began in October, 1997.
14 Reflects tuition reimbursement paid in 1999.
15 Reflects bonus earned in 1997, $20,000 of which was paid in 1998
16 Represents consulting fees paid prior to when Ms. Souverielle became
an employee of the Bank.
17 Reflects a payout for previously accrued but unused vacation.
</FN>
</TABLE>
60
<PAGE>
OPTION GRANTS
Options granted during the year 1999 were cancelled. The following table sets
forth information regarding stock options granted to the named executive
officers of the Company or Bank on February 1, 2000.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
POTENTIAL REALIZABLE
INDIVIDUAL GRANTS VALUE AT ASSUMED
------------------
ANNUAL RATE OF STOCK PRICE
APPRECIATION FOR OPTION TERM
----------------------------
PERCENT OF
NUMBER TOTAL OPTIONS
OF SECURITIES GRANTED TO EXERCISE OR
UNDERLYING EMPLOYEES IN BASE PRICE EXPIRATION
NAME OPTIONS GRANTED FISCAL YEAR PER SHARE DATE 5% 10%
---- --------------- ----------- --------- ---- -- ---
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Jae Souverielle 3,500 2% $7.50 02/01/00 16,508 41,836
Sharon A. Schmidt 5,000 3% 7.50 02/01/00 23,584 59,765
Nancy Ferretti-Foster 5,000 3% 7.50 02/01/00 23,584 59,765
Gene F. Gaines 100,000 65% 7.50 02/01/00 471,671 1,195,307
Larry Patapoff 30,000 20% 7.50 02/01/00 141,501 358,592
Robert Dyck 5,000 3% 7.50 02/01/00 23,504 59,765
</TABLE>
The foregoing options were granted under either the 1990 and 1992 plan, which
were adopted by the Board of Directors and approved by the shareholders.
Pursuant to the plan options for shares of common stock of the Company are
granted to officers and key management personnel, as recommended by the
Compensation Committee and approved by the Board of Directors.
ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT
CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS
The following table lists the holdings of the only persons (including
any "group" as that term is used in Section 13(d)(3) of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, as amended) known by the Company to be the beneficial owners of
more than five percent (5%) of the Company's outstanding Common Stock as of
February 29, 2000 based upon 2,030,754 shares outstanding on that date.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
NAME AND ADDRESS AMOUNT AND NATURE OF PERCENT
OF BENEFICIAL OWNER BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP OF CLASS
------------------- -------------------- --------
<S> <C> <C>
Franklin Mutual Advisers, Inc. 171,216(1) 8.4%
51 John F. Kennedy Parkway
Short Hills, New Jersey 07078
Basswood Partners, L.P. 150,211(2) 7.4%
Basswood Management, Inc.
Matthew Lindenbaum
Bennett Lindenbaum
645 Madison Avenue
10th Floor
New York, New York 10022
Banc Fund III L.P. 137,650(3) 6.8%
Bank Fund III Trust
Banc Fund IV L.P.
Banc Fund IV Trust
Banc Fund V L.P.
208 S. LaSalle Street
Chicago, Illinois 60604
Jay Spellman 127,188(4) 5.9%
Redwood Asset Management, L.P.
200 Park Avenue
Suite 3900
New York, New York 10166
Robert H. Leshner 117,416(5) 5.5%(6)
312 Walnut Street
Suite 2100
Cincinnati, OH 45202
- -------------------------
<FN>
(1) As reported in a Schedule 13G filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission
("SEC") on January 18, 2000.
(2) As reported in Amendment No. 1 to a Schedule D filed with the SEC on
January 5, 1999.
(3) As reported in Amendment No. 1 to a Schedule 13D filed with the SEC on
November 5, 1998
(4) As reported in a Schedule 13D filed with the SEC on November 3, 1998.
(5) As reported in Amendment No. 3 to Schedule 13D filed with the SEC on
November 15, 1996. 110,250 of the reported shares
are related to a presently exercisable Warrant.
(6) Warrants convertible into shares of Common Stock held by Mr. Leshner
which are exercisable within 60 days after March 1, 1999, are treated
as outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage of
outstanding Common Stock owned by Mr. Leshner, but not for the
purpose of computing the percentage of Common Stock owned by any
other person.
</FN>
</TABLE>
MANAGEMENT
The following table sets forth certain information concerning the
beneficial ownership of the Company's outstanding Common Stock as of March 1,
2000 by each director and executive officer of the Company and the Bank, and by
all directors and executive officers of the Company and the Bank as a group.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
AMOUNT AND NATURE PERCENT
OF BENEFICIAL Of
NAME/TITLE OWNERSHIP(1) CLASS (2)
---------- --------- -----
<S> <C> <C>
Richard A. Berger, Director 24,571(3) 1.2%
Ronald L. Katz, M.D., Director 16,836(3) *
Lynn O. Poulson, Director and Secretary 9,210(4) *
Gene Gaines, Chairman of the Board, Chief Executive Officer, President 50,000 2.4%
and Director
Robert Margolis, M.D., Director 49 *
Jae Souverielle, Strategic Planning and Development and Senior Vice 2,600 *
President of the Bank
Melinda McIntyre-Kolpin 50 *
Larry Patapoff, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of 15,000 *
the Company and Chief Operating Officer and Executive Vice President of
the Bank
Robert Dyck, Senior Vice President, Credit Administration of the Bank 1,666(8) *
Sharon A. Schmidt, Senior Vice President and Chief Operations Officer
of the Bank 1,666(8)
Nancy Ferretti-Foster, Senior Vice President and Chief Information 1,676(8) *
Officer of the Bank
All Directors and Executive Officers 123,324(9) 5.8%
- -------------------------
<FN>
* Less than 1% of the shares outstanding.
1 Unless otherwise indicated, the persons named herein have sole voting
and investment power over the shares reported.
2 Convertible Notes and Options and Warrants to purchase shares of
Common Stock held by directors, executive officers and other persons
that were exercisable or convertible within 60 days after February
29,2000 are treated as outstanding for the purpose of computing the
number and percentage of outstanding securities of the class owned by
such persons, but not for the purpose of computing the percentage of
the class owned by any other person.
3 Includes 1,874 exercisable option shares.
4 Includes 1,874 exercisable option shares. Mr. Poulson has shared
voting and investment power over these shares.
5 Includes 50,000 exercisable option shares.
6 Includes 2,600 exercisable option shares.
7 Includes 15,000 exercisable option shares.
8 Includes 1,666 exercisable option shares
9 Includes the shares owned by the current directors and named
executive officers (12 in number) as a group, and includes 78,220
exercisable option shares.
</FN>
</TABLE>
ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS
The Company and the Bank entered into a Consulting Agreement dated
August 12, 1996 with Network Health Financial Services, Inc. ("NHFS"), a
Delaware corporation. Melinda McIntyre-Kolpin, the President of the Bank until
February 1, 2000 and a director of the Bank, is the Chief Executive Officer and
principal shareholder of NHFS. Pursuant to the Consulting Agreement, NHFS
provides consulting services to the Company and the Bank with respect to
personnel matters, operational procedures and client development and retention.
NHFS is paid its actual costs incurred in the performance of its duties under
the Consulting Agreement (including hourly rates for certain specified NHFS
personnel while they are performing consulting services), plus an additional 25%
of such costs. In addition, the Company and Bank pay flat monthly rates for the
services of Ms. McIntyre-Kolpin and Patti Derry. During 1999, the Company and
the Bank paid NHFS the total amount of $641,000 pursuant to the Consulting
Agreement. Any party may terminate the Consulting Agreement by giving 30 days
notice to the other parties. The Company gave the required 30-day notice to
terminate the Consulting Agreement on March 6, 2000.
COMPENSATION COMMITTEE INTERLOCKS AND INSIDER PARTICIPATION
The joint Company and Bank Compensation Committee is currently comprised of Lynn
O. Poulson, Robert Margolis and Richard Berger. Julie P. Thompson, Terry
Hartshorn and Ray Oyakawa, M.D., former Directors of the Company and Bank,
served on the Compensation Committee until February 1, 2000, February 29, 2000
and February 24, 1999, respectively.
Mr. Berger, Mr. Poulson, Ms. McIntyre, Mr. Gaines, Robert Margolis,
M.D., Ms. Foster and Ms. Schmidt and companies with which the foregoing are
associated, are customers of, and have had banking transactions with the Bank,
some of which have included extensions of credit during 1999. A director of the
Company and the Bank, who resigned in February, 1999, and a company with which
he is associated, had extensions of credit as of December 31, 1999 totaling
approximately $3.1 million, of which $1.5 million was on nonaccrual status. At
December 31, 1998, total extensions of credit were $3.0 million, of which
$810,000 was on non-accrual status. In management's opinion, all loans and
commitments to lend included in such transactions were made in the ordinary
course of business and in compliance with applicable laws on substantially the
same terms, including interest rates, collateral and repayment terms, as those
prevailing for comparable transactions with other persons of similar
creditworthiness and did not involve more than the normal risk of collectibility
or present other unfavorable terms when initially underwritten.
PART IV
ITEM 14. EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES, AND REPORTS ON FORM 8-K
(a) Financial Statements
See Index to Consolidated Financial Statements of Professional
Bancorp, Inc. and Subsidiaries, which is part of this Form 10-K.
(b) Reports on Form 8-K
Form 8-K filed on October 8, 1999 announcing the resignation of KPMG
Peat Marwick LLP as the Company's accountants.
Form 8-K /A filed on October 14, 1999 amending the Form 8-K filed on
October 8, 1999 concerning KPMG Peat Marwick LLP
(c) Exhibits
64
<PAGE>
EXHIBIT NO.
3.1 Articles of Incorporation (filed as Exhibit 3.3 to the Company's
1989 10-K Report and incorporated herein by this reference).
3.2 Amendment to Articles of Incorporation, dated September 8, 1992
(filed as Exhibit 3.3 to the Company's 1995 10-K/A Report filed on
June 3, 1996 and incorporated herein by this reference).
3.3 Bylaws adopted April 25, 1990, as amended July 25, 1990 (filed as
Exhibit 3.2 to the Company's 1995 10-K/A Report filed on June 3,
1996 and incorporated herein by this reference).
4.1 Warrant to purchase 100,000 shares of Common Stock dated 12-31-92,
issued to Robert H. Leshner (filed as Exhibit 4.1 in the Company's
1992 10-K Report and incorporated herein by this reference).
4.2 Warrant to purchase 12,500 shares of Common Stock dated 12-31-92
issued to Andrew E. Haas. (Filed as Exhibit 4.2 in the Company's
1998 Form 10-K and incorporated herein by this reference)
4.3 Warrant to purchase 12,500 shares of Common Stock dated
12-31-92, issued to Curtis Swindall. (Filed as Exhibit 4.1
in the Company's 1992 10-K Report and incorporated herein
by this reference).
10.1* Indemnity Agreement entered into with directors and certain
officers dated October 25, 1989 (filed as Exhibit 10.11 to the
Company's 1995 10-K/A Report filed on June 3, 1996 and
incorporated herein by this reference).
10.2* 1990 Stock Option Plan (filed as Exhibit 28.A in the Company's
1990 10-K Report on Form 8, Amendment No. 1 dated April 29, 1991
and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.3* 1992 Stock Option Plan (filed as Exhibit A in the Company's 1992
Proxy Statement and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.4* 1998 Stock Option Plan (filed as an Exhibit "A" to the Company's
1998 Proxy Statement and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.5* Stock repurchase agreement (filed as Exhibit 10.1 in Form 8-K,
dated December 18, 1990 and incorporated herein by this
reference).
10.6 Consulting Agreement dated as of August 12, 1996 between Bancorp,
First Professional Bank, N.A. and Network Health Financial
Services, Inc. (filed as Exhibit 10.6 to the Company's 1996 Form
10-K Report and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.7 Amendment No. 1 to Consulting Agreement dated as of August 12,
1996 between Professional Bancorp, Inc., First Professional Bank,
N.A. and Network Health Financial Services, Inc. (Filed as Exhibit
10.7 in the Company's 1998 Form 10-K and Incorporated herein by
reference.)
10.8* Salary Continuation Agreement entered into between the Bank and
Joel W. Kovner dated May 1, 1992 (filed as Exhibit 10.25 to the
Company's 1992 10-K Report and incorporated herein by this
reference).
10.9 Settlement Agreement dated as of July 8, 1996 among Bancorp, the
Bank, the Shareholders Protective Committee and certain officers
and directors (filed as Exhibit 1 to the Company's Form 8-K filed
July 22, 1996 and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.10 Lease for premises at 606 Broadway, Santa Monica, California
(filed as Exhibit 10(a) to the Company's Registration Statement on
Form S-1, File No. 2-76371 filed March 8, 1982 and incorporated
herein by this reference).
65
<PAGE>
10.11 Lease for premises at 520 Broadway, Santa Monica, California
(filed as Exhibit 10.5 in the Company's 1983 10-K Report and
incorporated herein by this reference).
10.12 Lease for premises at 8600 West 3rd Street, Suite #1, Los Angeles,
California (filed as Exhibit 10.6 in the Company's 1983 10-K
Report and incorporated herein by this reference.
10.13 Lease for second floor premises and extension of lease of entire
premises at 606 Broadway, Santa Monica, California (filed as
Exhibit 10.8 in the Company's 1984 10-K Report and incorporated
herein by this reference).
10.14 Lease for premises at 9629 Brighton Way, Beverly Hills, California
(filed as Exhibit 10.9 in the Company's 1984 10-K Report and
incorporated herein by this reference).
10.15 Lease for premises at 5525 Etiwanda Street, Tarzana, California
(filed as Exhibit 10.8 in the Company's 1986 10-K Report and
incorporated herein by this reference).
10.16 Lease for premises at 55 E. California, Pasadena, California
(filed as Exhibit 10.65 in the Company's 1991 10-K Report and
incorporated herein by this reference).
10.17 Lease for premises at 10 North 5th Street, Redlands, California,
(filed as Exhibit 10.7 in the Company's 1991 10-K Report and
incorporated herein by this reference).
10.18 Lease for premises at 9900 Norwalk Boulevard, Santa Fe Springs,
California, (filed as Exhibit 10.75 in the Company's 1992 10-K
Report and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.19* Employment agreement dated November 1, 1999 with Larry Patapoff
(filed as Exhibit 10.19 in the Company's September 30, 1999 10-Q
and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.20* Employment agreement dated October 21, 1999 with Gene Gaines
(filed as Exhibit 10.20 in the Company's September 30, 1999 10-Q
and incorporated herein by this reference).
10.21* First amendment to Employment Agreement with Gene Gaines effective
February 1, 2000.
10.22* First amendment to Employment Agreement with Larry Patapoff
effective February 1, 2000
10.23 Regulatory Agreement with OCC dated March 22, 2000
10.24 Key Employee Incentive Agreement between the Bank and Nancy
Ferretti-Foster dated December 21, 2000.
10.25 Key Employee Incentive Agreement between the Bank and Sharon
Schmidt dated December 21, 1999
11 Statement Computation of Earnings Per Share -
Incorporated by reference to Item 8 - Financial Statement.
21 Subsidiaries of the Registrant (filed as Exhibit in the Company's
1986 10-K Report and incorporated herein by this reference).
23.1 Consent of Moss Adams LLP
23.2 Consent of KPMG LLP
27 Financial Data Schedule
*Identified as a management contract or compensatory agreement.
(d) Financial Statements
66
<PAGE>
All schedules are omitted because they are not required, not
applicable or because the information is included in the financial
statements or notes thereto or is not material.
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to requirements of Section 13 or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act
of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf
by the undersigned hereunto duly authorized.
Date: March 30,2000 PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC.
(Registrant)
By: /s/Larry Patapoff
Larry Patapoff, Chief Financial Officer
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report
has been signed below by the following persons on behalf the registrant and in
the capacities and on the dates indicated.
SIGNATURE TITLE DATE
/S/ RICHARD A. BERGER Director March 30, 2000
- --------------------------
Richard A. Berger
/S/ RONALD L. KATZ, M.D. Director March 30, 2000
- ------------------------
Ronald L. Katz, M.D.
/S/ LYNN O. POULSON, J.D. Director March 30, 2000
- -----------------------------
Lynn O. Poulson, J.D. Secretary
/S/ GENE F. GAINES Chairman of the Board,
Chief Executive
- -------------------------
Gene Gaines Officer, Director March 30, 2000
/S/ ROBERT J. MARGOLIS, M.D. Director March 30, 2000
---------------------------
Robert J. Margolis, M.D.
67
<PAGE>
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
PAGE
---
Independent Auditors' Report - Moss Adams LLP.................................69
Independent Auditors' Report - KPMG LLP ......................................70
Consolidated Financial Statements of Professional Bancorp, Inc.
Consolidated Balance Sheets.............................................71
--
Consolidated Statements of Operations and Comprehensive Income (Loss)...72
--
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders' Equity..............73
--
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows...................................74
--
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements..............................75
--
<PAGE>
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' REPORT
To the Board of Directors
Professional Bancorp, Inc.
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheet of Professional
Bancorp, Inc. and Subsidiary as of December 31, 1999 and the related
consolidated statements of operations and comprehensive income (loss), changes
in stockholders' equity, and cash flows for the year ended December 31, 1999.
These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management.
Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based
on our audit.
We conducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards.
Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable
assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in
all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Professional
Bancorp, Inc. and Subsidiary as of December 31, 1999 and the consolidated
results of their operations and cash flows for the year ended December 31, 1999
in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.
MOSS ADAMS LLP
Los Angeles, California
January 28, 2000 except for
Note 8 as to which the date
is February 1, 2000 and
Note 11 as to which the date
is March 22, 2000
69
<PAGE>
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' REPORT
The Board of Directors
Professional Bancorp, Inc.:
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheet of
Professional Bancorp, Inc. (a Pennsylvania corporation) and subsidiary as of
December 31, 1998 and the related consolidated statements of operations and
comprehensive income, changes in shareholders' equity and cash flows for each of
the years in the two-year period ended December 31, 1998. These consolidated
financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our
responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial
statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted
auditing standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits
to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free
of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence
supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit
also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates
made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement
presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our
opinion.
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to
above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of
Professional Bancorp, Inc. and subsidiary as of December 31, 1998 and the
results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the
two-year period ended December 31, 1998, in conformity with generally accepted
accounting principles.
KPMG LLP
Los Angeles, California
April 19, 1999
70
<PAGE>
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
DECEMBER 31, DECEMBER 31,
NOTES 1999 1998
----- ---- ----
ASSETS Cash and due from banks:
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Noninterest-bearing 2 $ 15,721,372 $ 20,992,183
Interest-bearing 697,430 572,519
Federal funds sold
27,000,000 10,400,000
-------------- --------------
Cash and cash equivalents 43,418,802 31,964,702
Securities available-for-sale (cost of $48,187,000 and 3
$81,369,000 in 1999 and 1998, respectively) 45,524,729 80,891,072
Securities held-to-maturity (fair value of $17,901,000 3
and $24,135,000 in 1999 and 1998, respectively) 18,199,500 24,080,592
Loans (net of allowance for loan losses of $5,873,000
and $2,200,000 in 1999 and 1998, respectively) 4, 10 156,484,089 115,518,693
Premises and equipment, net 5 1,151,919 1,390,128
Deferred tax asset 7 2,843,726 1,242,748
Accrued interest receivable and other assets
5,866,918 4,613,504
--------------- ---------------
$ 273,489,683 $ 259,701,439
=============== ===============
LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
LIABILITIES
Deposits: 6
Demand, noninterest-bearing $ 109,560,458 $ 109,421,629
Demand, interest-bearing 16,033,189 16,710,541
Savings and money market 84,783,194 75,500,642
Time deposits
45,651,235 28,947,934
------------------- --------------------
Total deposits 256,028,076 230,580,746
Convertible notes 12 679,000 1,116,000
Accrued interest payable and other liabilities 7
1,914,639 2,683,582
------------------- --------------------
Total liabilities 258,621,715 234,380,328
------------------- ----------------------
Commitments and contingent liabilities 9
SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY: 8, 11
Common stock, $.008 par value; 12,500,000 shares
authorized; 2,100,221 and 2,065,811 issued
and 2,030,754 and 1,996,344 outstanding in 1999 and 1998,
respectively $ 16,801 $ 16,526
Additional paid-in-capital 21,271,477 20,873,603
Retained earnings (accumulated deficit) (3,221,239) 5,239,275
Treasury stock, at cost (69,467 shares in 1999 (537,251) (537,251)
and 1998)
Accumulated other comprehensive loss 3 (2,661,820) (271,042)
------------------- --------------------
Total shareholders' equity
14,867,968 25,321,111
------------------- --------------------
$ 273,489,683 $ 259,701,439
=============== ===============
</TABLE>
SEE ACCOMPANYING NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
71
<PAGE>
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31,
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
NOTES 1999 1998 1997
-----
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
INTEREST INCOME
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Loans 4 $ 12,762,486 $ 10,264,651 $ 9,686,133
Securities 3 4,374,644 4,890,065 5,834,456
Federal funds sold and securities purchased
under agreements to resell 1,109,345 1,773,156 1,159,971
Interest-bearing deposits in other banks 48,863 20,550 28,779
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
TOTAL INTEREST INCOME 18,295,338 16,948,422 16,709,339
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
INTEREST EXPENSE
Deposits 6 3,258,697 3,373,818 3,336,954
Convertible notes 45,855 252,882 473,619
Federal funds purchased and securities
sold under agreements to repurchase 108,737 3,055 15,807
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
TOTAL INTEREST EXPENSE 3,413,289 3,629,755 3,826,380
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
NET INTEREST INCOME 14,882,049 13,318,667 12,882,959
Provision for loan losses 4 13,992,636 405,829 180,000
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
NET INTEREST INCOME AFTER PROVISION
FOR LOAN LOSSES 889,413 12,912,838 12,702,959
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
OTHER OPERATING INCOME
Net gain (loss) on sale of securities available-for-sale 3 39,610 (5,640) -
Merchant discount 290,913 207,572 272,763
Mortgage brokering fees 34,412 162,811 105,660
Service charges on deposits 940,041 918,354 791,247
Other income 547,336 452,043 622,964
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
TOTAL OTHER OPERATING INCOME 1,852,312 1,735,140 1,792,634
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
OTHER OPERATING EXPENSES
Salaries and employee benefits 6,544,938 5,987,476 5,803,575
Occupancy 1,498,062 1,438,988 1,481,016
Legal fees, net of legal settlement 1,067,627 394,908 (105,834)
Furniture and equipment 827,984 810,920 828,845
Professional services 10 1,462,935 1,145,885 1,346,273
Strategic planning and investor relations 60,404 147,743 375,086
FDIC assessment 55,927 24,951 27,063
Office supplies 287,131 237,273 226,620
Other assessment 176,097 189,556 224,613
Telephone 298,165 287,849 272,692
Audit, accounting and examinations 340,365 188,733 131,603
Postage 145,161 160,151 150,353
Messenger service 55,101 33,615 70,692
Imprinted checks 9,538 42,709 90,939
Donations 128,794 93,900 101,427
Meetings and business developments 211,458 191,026 163,488
Other expense 1,130,428 851,043 936,317
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
TOTAL OTHER OPERATING EXPENSES 14,300,115 12,226,726 12,124,768
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
Earnings (loss) before taxes (11,558,390) 2,421,252 2,370,825
Provision (benefit) for income taxes 7 (3,198,627) 989,653 892,300
----------------- ------------------ -------------------
NET EARNINGS (LOSS) (8,359,763) 1,431,599 1,478,525
Unrealized gain (loss) on securities available-for-sale,
net of tax (2,390,778) (17,722) 171,134
Reclassification adjustment, net of tax --- 10,489 ---
----------- -------- -------
Comprehensive income(loss) $ (10,750,541) $ 1,424,366 $ 1,649,659
================ ================ =================
EARNINGS (LOSS) PER SHARE
Basic 1 $ (4.15) $ 0.81 $ 1.10
Diluted 1 (4.15)(a) $ 0.74 $ 0.97
(a) No effect has been given to dilutive securities because the
impact is anti-dilutive.
</TABLE>
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
72
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1999, 1998 AND 1997
RETAINED ACCUMULATED
ADDITIONAL EARNINGS OTHER
COMMON STOCK PAID-IN (ACCUMULATED TREASURY COMPREHENSIVE
--------------------------
SHARES AMOUNT CAPITAL DEFICIT) STOCK INCOME (LOSS) TOTAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Balance, December 31, 1996 $ 1,341,316 $ 11,286 $12,488,001 $ 2,514,501 $ (537,251) (434,943) $14,041,594
Conversion of notes (Note 12)
14,174 113 158,433 - - - 158,546
Exercise of stock options (Note 8)
1,732 14 13,340 - - - 13,354
Change in net unrealized holding
gain on securities available-for-sale
net of Tax benefit of $64,346 - - - - - 171,134 171,134
Net earnings - - - 1,478,525 - - 1,478,525
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance, December 31, 1997 1,357,222 11,413 12,659,774 3,993,026 (537,251) (263,809) 15,863,153
Conversion of notes (Note 12) 334,494 2,676 3,798,376 - - - 3,801,052
Issuance of cash dividend - - - (185,350) - - (185,350)
Exercise of stock options (Note 8) 304,628 2,437 3,791,926 - - - 3,794,363
Tax benefit on stock options exercised - - 561,344 - - - 561,344
Forfeited interest on conversion of
Convertible notes - - 62,183 - - - 62,183
Change in net unrealized holding loss
on securities available-for-sale net
of tax - - - - - (7,233) (7,233)
Benefit $12,190
Net earnings - - - 1,431,599 - - 1,431,599
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance, December 31, 1998 1,996,344 16,526 20,873,603 5,239,275 (537,251) (271,042) 25,321,111
Conversion of Notes (Note 12) 34,410 275 397,874 - - - 398,149
Cash Dividends - - - (100,751) - - (100,751)
Change in net unrealized holding loss
on securities available-for-sale net
of tax benefit of $975,000 which has been - - - - - (2,390,778) (2,390,778)
fully reserved
Net Loss - - - (8,359,763) - - (8,359,763)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance, December 31, 1999 2,030,754 $ 16,801 $ 21,271,477 $ (3,221,239)$(537,251) $ (2,661,820)$14,867,968
===========================================================================================
</TABLE>
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
73
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31,
1999 1998 1997
---- - ----- ----
Cash flows from operating activities:
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Net earnings (loss) $ (8,359,763) $ 1,431,599 $ 1,478,525
Adjustments to reconcile net earnings (loss) to net
cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 584,440
590,804 563,171
Provision for loan losses 13,992,636 180,000
405,829
Loss on sale of securities available-for-sale 39,610 5,640 -
Amortization of convertible note expense -
69,019 103,495
Deferred taxes (1,600,978) 19,553 1,919,341
Accrued interest receivable
and other assets (1,253,414) (197,390)
810,887
Accrued interest payable and other liabilities (807,794) 243,364 (288,120)
Net amortization of premiums and discounts
on securities held-to-maturity (37,113) 262,390
332,861
Net amortization of premiums and discounts
on securities available-for-sale
(30,321) 318,562 263,101
-------- -------- -------
Net cash from operating activities
2,662,171 3,219,841 5,292,790
--------- --------- ---------
Cash flows from investing activities:
Proceeds from:
Maturities of securities held-to-maturity - 500,000
3,000,000
Maturities of securities available-for-sale - 4,000,000
8,550,000
Principal payments and maturities of:
Mortgage-backed securities held-to-maturity 5,638,016 6,501,551
9,746,919
Mortgage-backed securities available-for-sale 7,270,175 13,155,115 8,404,884
Sales of securities available-for-sale 27,299,512 15,331,685 -
Purchases of:
Securities held-to-maturity - -
(2,991,950)
Securities available-for-sale (1,458,090) (65,147,023) (10,587,422)
Mortgage-backed securities held-to-maturity - - -
Net (increase) decrease in loans (54,958,032) (12,024,440)
(13,320,921)
Purchases of bank premises and equipment, net
(346,231) (433,161) (499,460)
--------- --------- ---------
Net cash from investing activities
(16,554,650)) (30,320,905) (5,493,318)
------------- ------------ -----------
Cash flows from financing activities:
Net increase (decrease) in demand deposits
and savings accounts 8,744,029 (300,917)
(8,020,242)
Net increase (decrease) in time certificates of deposit 16,703,301 1,417,999 (3,792,842)
Proceeds from exercise of stock options - 13,354
3,794,364
Cash dividends paid
(100,751) (185,350) -
--------- --------- -
Net cash from financing activities
25,346,579 4,726,096 (11,799,730)
---------- --------- ------------
Net (decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents 11,454,100 (22,374,968) (12,000,308)
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year
31,964,702 54,339,670 66,339,978
---------- ----------- ----------
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year $ 43,418,802 $ 31,964,702 $ 54,339,670
=============== = ================== =================
Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information
Cash paid during the year for:
Interest $ 3,388,000 $ 3,687,607 $ 3,907,889
Income taxes 1,120,000 187,000 523,009
Non-cash investing and financial activities:
Unrealized losses on securities
available-for-sale 2,390,778 30,330 309,059
Conversion of notes (see Note 12) 398,149 3,801,052 158,546
Tax benefit on stock options exercised - 561,344 -
Forfeited interest on conversion of convertible notes - 62,183 -
</TABLE>
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements
<PAGE>
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
DECEMBER 31, 1999, 1998 AND 1997
NOTE 1 - SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
Professional Bancorp, Inc. and its subsidiary (collectively the
"Company") are engaged in the general commercial banking business and provide a
wide range of commercial banking services primarily directed towards meeting the
financial needs of the medical services community and other distinct non-medical
service organizations. Services include those traditionally offered by
commercial banks such as checking and savings accounts; time certificates of
deposit; and commercial, consumer/installment, home equity and short-term real
estate loans, with an emphasis on cash flow lending. The service area of the
Company consists of the California counties of Los Angeles, Orange, Riverside,
San Bernardino and Ventura with a full-service office at its Santa Monica
headquarters and four full-service branches located in Beverly Hills, Tarzana,
Pasadena and Redlands.
The accounting and reporting policies of the Company are in accordance
with generally accepted accounting principles and conform to general practices
within the banking industry. The preparation of these financial statements
requires management to make estimates and assumptions that effect the reported
amount of assets and liabilities, disclosure of contingent assets and
liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of
revenues and expenses during the reported periods. The allowance for loan losses
and the deferred tax asset are material estimates subject to change.
CONSOLIDATION
The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of
Professional Bancorp, Inc. (the "Company") and its wholly owned subsidiary,
First Professional Bank, N.A. (the "Bank") and Professional Bancorp Mortgage,
Inc. (PBMI) a majority owned subsidiary of the Bank. All material intercompany
accounts and transactions have been eliminated in the consolidated financial
statements.
FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards ("SFAS") No. 107
"Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments" ("SFAS 107")
requires the disclosure of the fair value of financial instruments, whether or
not recognized on the statement of financial condition, for which it is
practicable to estimate the value. A significant portion of the Bank's assets
and liabilities are financial instruments as defined under SFAS 107. Fair
values, estimates and assumptions are set forth in Note 14, Fair Value of
Financial Instruments.
INTEREST RATE RISKS
The Company, as an institution with long-term assets (both loans and
investments), may experience a decrease in profitability and the value of such
assets if the general level of interest rates rise. Interest rates paid on
certain deposits may rise more quickly in a rapidly rising interest rate
environment than do interest rates on securities, in which case the Company
would be exposed to the risk that its cost of funds may rise more quickly than
its interest income. Changes in the general level of interest rates affect the
Company's various securities in differing ways. In a declining interest rate
environment, the rate at which the underlying mortgages of mortgage-backed
securities are prepaid tends to increase as borrowers refinance their loans. If
a higher than anticipated level of prepayments were to continue for an extended
period of time, there could be an adverse effect on the level of the Company's
outstanding securities. Securities held in the Company's available-for-sale
portfolio are reported at fair value, with unrealized gains and losses, net of
taxes, excluded from earnings and reported as a separate component of
shareholders' equity. In a rising interest rate environment, unrealized losses
may negatively affect the Company's shareholders' equity from quarter to
quarter.
75
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISK
Concentrations of credit risk exist for groups of borrowers when they
have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet
contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic or other
conditions. The ability of the Bank's borrowers to repay their commitments is
contingent on several factors, including the economic conditions in the
borrowers' geographic area and the individual financial condition of the
borrowers. The Bank's lending activities are primarily conducted in Southern
California. The Bank currently focuses on the origination of commercial loans to
health care organizations ranging from single practitioners to large
multi-specialty medical groups. Ongoing changes in the delivery of health care
could negatively impact certain borrowers. The Bank has loans and loan
commitments to a small number of clients that total between $2,000,000 and the
Bank's legal lending limit of approximately $3.7 million.
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
For purposes of reporting cash flows, cash and cash equivalents include
cash on hand, amounts due from banks and federal funds sold. Generally, federal
funds are purchased and sold for one day periods.
SECURITIES
The Company classifies its investment in debt and equity securities as
held-to-maturity, available-for-sale or trading securities, as applicable.
Securities held-to-maturity are those debt securities for which the Company has
the ability and intent to hold until maturity. Trading securities are acquired
and sold to benefit from short-term movements in market prices. All other
securities are classified as available-for-sale. All securities are under the
control of the Company.
Securities held-to-maturity are recorded at amortized cost, adjusted
for the amortization or accretion of premiums or discounts. Trading securities
are carried at fair value and are recorded as of their trade dates. Gains or
losses on trading securities, both realized and unrealized, are recognized
currently in income. As of December 31, 1999, the Company does not have, nor
contemplates having, any securities classified as trading securities. Securities
classified as available-for-sale are recorded at fair value with any unrealized
gains or losses, reflected as an addition or reduction of accumulated other
comprehensive income, net of tax, as a separate component of shareholders'
equity. Unrealized losses on securities, reflecting a decline in value judged to
be other than temporary, are charged to income in the consolidated statements of
operations.
Premiums and discounts are amortized or accreted over the life of the
related securities held-to-maturity and available-for-sale as an adjustment to
yield using the interest method. Interest income is recognized when earned.
Realized gains and losses on securities are included in operations and are
derived using the specific identification method for determining the cost of the
securities sold.
SECURITIES PURCHASED UNDER AGREEMENTS TO RESELL AND SECURITIES SOLD
UNDER AGREEMENTS TO REPURCHASE
The Bank purchases securities under agreements to resell and sells
securities under agreements to repurchase. The agreements have a duration of one
business day and are fully collateralized. Securities purchased under resale
agreements are recorded as short-term investments, while securities sold under
repurchase agreements are recorded as short-term obligations. At December 31,
1999 and 1998, the Bank had no such agreements outstanding.
76
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
DERIVATIVES
The Bank may enter into interest rate exchange agreements and cap and
floor agreements for protection against future fluctuations in the interest
rates of specifically identified assets or liabilities. Interest rate swap
agreements are for the purpose of synthetically altering the interest rates on a
portion of the Bank's super NOW and money market accounts. Interest rate floor
agreements are used to reduce the potential impact of lower interest rates which
would reduce the interest income on loans and on certain securities. Interest
rate cap agreements are used to reduce the potential impact of rising interest
rates which would reduce the interest income on certain securities. Interest
rate swap agreements and interest rate cap and floor agreements are accounted
for as hedges. Gains or losses on the sales of such agreements are deferred and
transferred into interest income or expense over the maturity period of the
agreement. Net interest income (expense) resulting from the differential between
interest rate exchange payments is recorded on a current basis. Premiums paid
for purchased interest rate cap and floor agreements are amortized on a
straight-line basis to interest expense over the terms of the agreements.
Unamortized premiums are included in other assets in the consolidated financial
statements. Amounts receivable under cap and floor agreements are recorded as an
increase to interest income.
MORTGAGE BROKERING FEES
The Company's mortgage brokering operations, conducted by PBMI, consist
solely of a broker function. This service is provided to assist the Bank's
clients in obtaining mortgage loans with other institutions. PBMI does not
originate or sell mortgage loans. PBMI earns revenue, in the form of points and
any documentation fees charged on a loan, but is otherwise not involved in the
loan.
MERCHANT DISCOUNT INCOME
Merchant discount income consists of the fees charged on credit card
receipts submitted by the Bank's business clients for processing. The income
received and the fees paid by the Bank to credit card issuers and expenses for
third party processors are netted and reported as a component of other income.
Such amounts are recognized when received or paid.
LOANS AND THE RELATED ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES
Loans are recorded at face value, less payments received. Interest on
loans is accrued daily as earned, except where a reasonable doubt exists as to
the full collectibility of interest or principal, in which case the accrual of
income is discontinued and the balance of accrued interest is reversed.
Generally, this means that loans are put on nonaccrual status when interest is
ninety days or more past due, unless the loan is well secured and in the process
of collection. All payments received subsequent to the loan being put on
nonaccrual are used to reduce the principal balance. Only after the principal is
reduced to zero is interest income realized. Once a loan is placed on nonaccrual
it generally remains on nonaccrual unless the borrower has the capacity to make
payments as evidenced by tax returns and other financial statements and has the
intent to make payments as evidenced by keeping the loan current for a period of
three to six months.
Loan fees in excess of certain direct origination costs are deferred
and amortized into interest income utilizing the interest method over the lives
of the related loans. When a loan is repaid or sold, any unamortized net
deferred fee balance is credited to income. Accretion of deferred loan fees is
discontinued when loans are placed on nonaccrual status.
77
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
The allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level considered
adequate by management to provide for loan losses. Credits deemed uncollectible
are charged to the allowance. Provisions for loan losses and recoveries on loans
previously charged off are added to the allowance. Management, in determining
the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses, takes into consideration (1) loan
loss experience, (2) collateral values, (3) changes in the loan portfolio, (4)
an assessment of the effect of current and anticipated economic conditions on
the loan portfolio, and (5) examinations conducted by Bank regulatory agencies.
While management believes the allowance for loan losses is adequate to absorb
losses inherent in the loan portfolio, there exists the risk of losses which
cannot be precisely quantified. Because this risk is continually changing in
response to factors beyond the control of the Bank, such as the state of the
economy, management's judgment as to the adequacy of the allowance for loan
losses is necessarily an estimate. In addition, various regulatory agencies, as
an integral part of their examination process, periodically review the Bank's
allowance for loan losses. Such agencies may require the Bank to record
additions to the allowance based on their judgments of information available to
them at the time of their examination.
IMPAIRED LOANS
The Company considers a loan to be impaired when, based upon current
information and events, it believes it is probable that the Company will be
unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan
agreement on a timely basis. Impairment of a loan is measured by the present
value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan's effective interest
rate, the loan's observable market price, or the fair value of the collateral if
the loan is collateral dependent. If the measure of the impaired loan is less
than the recorded investment in the loan, the Company recognizes impairment by
creating a valuation allowance with a corresponding charge to provision for loan
losses. Large groups of smaller balance homogenous loans that are collectively
evaluated for impairment are not subject to this accounting treatment.
For loans classified as nonaccrual and troubled debt restructurings,
specific valuation allowances are established for the difference between the
loan amount and the fair value of collateral less estimated selling costs.
Impaired loans which are performing under their contractual terms are reported
as performing loans and cash payments are allocated to principal and interest
in accordance with the terms of the loan.
PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT, NET
Premises and equipment are stated at cost, less accumulated
depreciation and amortization. Depreciation on furniture, fixtures, and
equipment is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful
lives of the related assets, which range from three to five years. Leasehold
improvements are capitalized and amortized over the lease term or estimated
useful lives of the improvements, whichever is shorter, using the straight-line
method.
AMORTIZATION OF CONVERTIBLE NOTE EXPENSES
Expenses associated with the convertible note offering in 1994 are
being amortized on a straight-line basis over the 10 year term of the note.
78
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
INCOME TAXES
The Company and its subsidiary file consolidated federal income and
state franchise tax returns. Provisions for income taxes are based on amounts
reported in the statements of income (after exclusion of non-taxable income such
as interest on state and municipal securities) and include deferred taxes on
temporary differences between tax and financial statement purposes. Deferred
taxes are computed using the asset and liability approach. A valuation allowance
is established for deferred tax assets if based on the weight of available
evidence, it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred
tax assets will not be realized. The valuation allowance is sufficient to reduce
the deferred tax assets to the amount that is more likely than not to be
realized.
EARNINGS (LOSS) PER SHARE
Earnings per share are based upon the weighted average number of shares
of common stock and common stock equivalents outstanding, net of common stock
held in treasury. Basic EPS excludes dilution and is computed by dividing income
available to common stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares
outstanding for the period. Diluted EPS reflects the potential dilution that
could occur if securities or other contracts to issue common stock were
exercised or converted into common stock or resulted from issuance of common
stock that then shared in earnings.
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
Comprehensive income consists of net earnings (loss) and net unrealized
gains (losses) on securities and is presented in the consolidated statements of
operations and comprehensive income.
STOCK OPTION PLAN
As permitted by SFAS 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, the
Company continues to apply APB Opinion No. 25 (APB 25) and related
interpretations in accounting for its stock option plans. Under SFAS 123, a fair
value method is used to determine compensation cost for stock options or similar
equity instruments. Compensation is measured at the grant date and is recognized
over the service or vesting period. Under APB 25, compensation cost is the
excess, if any, of the quoted market price of the stock at the measurement date
over the amount that must be paid to acquire the stock. SFAS 123 requires
disclosure of the proforma effect on income, as if the Company had adopted SFAS
123, which is disclosed in Note 8.
401(K) SAVINGS PLAN
The Bank has a 401(k) savings plan in effect for substantially all of
its full-time employees who have completed one year of continuous service.
Employee contributions under the plan are matched by the Bank up to a maximum of
3.0% of the employee's annual salary for 1999, 1998and 1997. Salaries and
employee benefits expense includes $114,700, $95,100, and $71,700 for 1999,
1998, and 1997, respectively, related to the Bank's contributions.
YEAR 2000 (UNAUDITED)
The Year 2000 issue presented a very real and significant challenge
to the Company, along with the entire financial services industry. This problem
had the potential to affect a wide range of systems and equipment, including
software and hardware, utilities, communications platforms and devices, and
facilities. The Year 2000 issue is the result of computer programs being written
using two digits rather than four to represent the calendar year.
79
<PAGE>
Software so developed and not corrected could have produced
inaccurate or unpredictable results when dates change in the year 2000. Such
occurrences could have had a material adverse effect on the Company's financial
condition, results of operations, or business as the Company, like most
financial organizations, was significantly subject to the potential Year 2000
issues due to the nature of financial information. Management had successfully
developed and implemented a Year 2000 Preparedness Plan. There is no known
impact on the Company related to the Year 2000 issue.
RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
During 1998, the Financial Accounting Standard Board (FASB) issued
Statement of Financial Accounting Standard ("SFAS") No. 133, "Accounting For
Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities" (SFAS 133) which establishes
accounting and reporting standards for derivative instruments, including certain
derivative instruments embedded in other contracts (collectively referred to as
derivatives) and for hedging activities. During 1999, the FASB issued SFAS 137,
"Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities - Deferral of
Effective Date of SFAS 133 and Amendment to SFAS 133", which amends certain
provisions of SFAS 133 and extends the initial effective date.
These standards require that an entity recognize all derivatives as
either assets or liabilities in the statement of financial position and measure
those instruments at fair value. If certain conditions are met, a derivative may
be specifically designated as (a) a hedge of the exposure to changes in the fair
value of a recognized asset or liability or an unrecognized firm commitment, (b)
a hedge of the exposure to variable cash flows of a forecasted transaction, or
(c) a hedge of the foreign currency exposure of a net investment in a foreign
operation, and unrecognized firm commitment, an available for sale security, or
a foreign-currency-denominated forecasted transaction.
Under these statements, an entity that elects to apply hedge
accounting is required to establish at the inception of the hedge the method it
will use for assessing the effectiveness of the hedging derivative and the
measurement approach for determining the ineffective aspect of the hedge. Those
methods must be consistent with the entity's approach to managing risk. These
statements are effective for the Company on July 1, 2000. Management is in the
process of determining what effect, if any, adoption of this statement will have
on the financial position or results of operations of the Company.
In October 1998, FASB issued SFAS 134,"Accounting for
Mortgage-Backed Securities Retained after the Securitization of Mortgage Loans
Held for Sale by a Mortgage Banking Enterprise, an amendment of
SFAS 65." Under SFAS 134, after the securitization of a mortgage loan held for
sale, retained mortgage-backed securities shall be classified in accordance
with the provisions of Statement 115. However, a mortgage banking enterprise
must classify as trading any retained mortgage-backed securities that it commits
to sell before or during the securitization process. SFAS 134 is effective for
the first quarter beginning after December 15, 1998 and enterprises may
reclassify mortgage-backed securities and other beneficial interests retained
after the securitization of mortgage loans held for sale from the trading
category, except for those with sales commitments in place when the Statement is
initially applied. The adoption of this statement did not have a significant
impact on the financial position or results of operations of the Company.
During 1999, the FASB issued SFAS 135, Rescission of SFAS 75 and
Technical Corrections, SFAS No. 136, "Transfer of Assets to a Not-For-Profit
Organization or Charitable Trust that Raises or Holds Contributions for Others."
Management does not believe either of these statements will have a significant
impact on the financial position or results of operations of the Company.
80
<PAGE>
NOTE 2 - RESTRICTED CASH BALANCES
Aggregate cash balances in the form of deposits with the Federal
Reserve Bank of approximately $8,098,000 and $5,661,000 were maintained to
satisfy federal regulatory requirements at December 31, 1999 and 1998,
respectively.
NOTE 3 - INVESTMENT SECURITIES
The amortized cost and fair value of securities available-for-sale are
as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
DECEMBER 31, 1999
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GROSS GROSS NET
AMORTIZED UNREALIZED UNREALIZED FAIR REALIZED
(in thousands) COST GAIN LOSS VALUE GAIN (LOSS)
---- ---- ---- ----- -----------
U.S. Government agency and
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
mortgage-backed securities $ 37,393 $ - $ 1,924 $ 35,469 $ 40
Small Business Administration securities 647 - 16 631 -
Municipal securities 2,551 - 173 2,378 -
Federal Reserve Bank Stock 439 - - 439 -
Collateralized mortgage obligations
7,157 - 549 6,608 -
----- --- --- ----- -
Total $ 48,187 $ - $ 45,525 $ 40
======== ======= ========= ======== =======
$2,662
DECEMBER 31, 1998
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GROSS GROSS NET
AMORTIZED UNREALIZED UNREALIZED FAIR REALIZED
(in thousands) COST GAIN LOSS VALUE GAIN (LOSS)
---- ---- ---- ----- -----------
U.S. Government agency and
mortgage-backed securities $ 68,487 $ 153 $ 514 $ $ (6)
68,126
Small Business Administration securities 858 852
1 7 -
Municipal securities 2,551 3 8 2,546 -
Federal Reserve Bank Stock 439 - - 439 -
Collateralized mortgage obligations 9,034 8,928
------ ------ ------------------------------ ------ -----
- 106 -
-- ---- -
Total $ 81,369 $ 157 $ 635 $ 80,891 $ (6)
= ========= = ======== = ======== = ========= =========
</TABLE>
During the year ended December 31, 1999 and 1998 securities
available-for-sale were sold for aggregate proceeds of $27,300,000 and
$15,337,000, respectively. These sales resulted in net realized gains and losses
of $96,000 and ($56,000) in 1999 and $12,000 and ($18,000) in 1998. There were
no sales of securities available-for-sale related gross realized gains or losses
during 1997.
81
<PAGE>
The amortized cost and estimated fair value of securities
available-for-sale at December 31, 1999, by contractual maturity is shown below.
Expected maturities will differ from contractual maturities because borrowers
may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without prepayment
penalties.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
AMORTIZED FAIR
(in thousands) COST VALUE
----------------- -----------------
<S> <C> <C>
Due within one year $ 439 $
439
Due after one year through five years -
-
Due after five years through ten years 1,689
1,606
Due after ten years
46,059 43,480
-----------------------------
Total $ $
= ==== = =
48,187 45,525
===================== ======
</TABLE>
The amortized cost and fair value of securities held-to-maturity are as
follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
DECEMBER 31, 1999
---------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
GROSS GROSS
AMORTIZED UNREALIZED UNREALIZED FAIR
(in thousands) COST GAIN LOSS VALUE
---- ---- ---- -----
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
U.S. Government securities $ 3,032 $ 10 $ 25 $ 3,017
U.S. Government agency securities 1,750 - 31 1,719
U.S. Government agency
mortgage-backed securities
13,418 - 253 13,165
------ - --- ------
Total $ 18,200 $ 10 $ 309 $ 17,901
========= ======= ======== =========
DECEMBER 31, 1998
---------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------
GROSS GROSS
AMORTIZED UNREALIZED UNREALIZED FAIR
(in thousands) COST GAIN LOSS VALUE
---- ---- ---- -----
U.S. Government securities $ 3,043 $ 151 - $ 3,194
U.S. Government agency securities 2,250 21 - 2,271
U.S. Government agency
mortgage-backed securities $ 18,788 $ 18,670
--------- ----------------- ------------- ---------
1 119
- ---
Total $ 24,081 $ 173 $ 119 $ 24,135
========= ======= ======= =========
</TABLE>
The amortized cost and estimated fair value of securities
held-to-maturity at December 31, 1999 by contractual maturity is shown below.
Expected maturities will differ from contractual maturities because borrowers
may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without prepayment
penalties.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
AMORTIZED FAIR
(in thousands) COST VALUE
---- -----
<S> <C>
Due after one year through five years $ $
5,135 5,087
Due after five years through ten years 9,037 8,794
Due after ten years
4,028 4,020
----- -----
Total $ $
= === = =
18,200 17,901
=================== ======
</TABLE>
There were no trading securities during 1999 and 1998.
82
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
During 1999, the highest daily balance and the average balance for
the securities was $105,470,000 and $74,349,000, respectively. During 1998, the
highest daily outstanding balance and average balance for the securities was
$107,941,000 and $83,900,000, respectively.
PLEDGED SECURITIES
U.S. Treasury securities with a carrying value of approximately
$3,032,000 and $3,043,000 were pledged to secure treasury tax and loan deposits
as required by law at December 31, 1999 and 1998, respectively.
NOTE 4 - LOANS AND THE RELATED ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES
A summary of the major components of loans outstanding at December 31,
1999 and 1998 is as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998
---- ----
<S> <C> <C>
Commercial loans $ 124,403 $ 93,952
Real estate secured commercial loans 27,538 11,698
Equity lines of credit 4,330 5,931
Other lines of credit 4,689 4,817
Installment loans 1,608 1,482
Lease financing
- 32
- --
Gross Loans 162,568 117,912
Less:
Allowance for loan losses (5,873) (2,200)
Deferred loan fees, net
(211) (193)
----- -----
Loans, net $ 156,484 $115,519
========= ========
The composition of gross loans outstanding
between fixed and variable is as follows:
Fixed rate $ 42,194 $ 16,734
Variable rate 120,374 101,178
------ ------- ------ -------
Total $ 162,568 $117,912
========= ========
The following table provides information with respect to the Company's
past due loans.
DECEMBER 31,
(in thousands) 1999 1998
---- ----
Loans 90 days or more past due
and still accruing $ $ 100
2,891
Nonaccrual loans 1,359
-------- ------ -----
8,412
Total past due loans $ $ 1,459
== = =======
11,303
</TABLE>
Total accrued interest on loans 90 days past due and still accruing
was $18,000 at December 31, 1999 and the Company had no accrued interest due on
loans 90 days past due at December 31, 1998.
83
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
The effect of nonaccrual loans on interest income for the years 1999
and 1998 is presented below:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998 ----
- ----
<S> <C> <C>
Contractual interest due $ 804 $ 126
Interest recognized
338 90
-------------- --
Net interest foregone $ 466 $ 36
======= ======
</TABLE>
The Company had approximately $8,708,000 in impaired loans as of
December 31, 1999. The carrying value of impaired loans for which there is a
related allowance for loan losses was $414,000, with the amount of specific
allowance for loan losses allocated to these loans of $134,000. There were
$8,294,000 in impaired loans for which there was no related specific allowance
for loan losses. The average recorded investment in impaired loans during 1999
was $4,436,000 and there was no income recorded utilizing either the cash basis
or accrual basis method of accounting. Impaired loans at December 31, 1999,
included $8,412,000 of nonaccrual loans.
The Company had approximately $1,836,000 in impaired loans as of
December 31, 1998. The carrying value of impaired loans for which there is a
related allowance for loan losses was $153,000, with the amount of specific
allowance for loan losses allocated to these loans of $41,000. There was
$1,683,000 in impaired loans for which there was no related specific allowance
for loan losses. The average recorded investment in impaired loans during 1998
was $1,131,085 and there was no income recorded utilizing either the cash basis
or accrual basis method of accounting. Impaired loans at December 31, 1998,
included $1,359,000 of nonaccrual loans.
The Company had approximately $1,199,000 in impaired loans as of
December 31, 1997. The carrying value of impaired loans for which there is a
related allowance for loan losses was $234,000, with the amount of specific
allowance for loan losses allocated to these loans of $80,000. There was
$965,000 in impaired loans for which there was no related specific allowance for
loan losses. The average recorded investment in impaired loans during 1997 was
$1,342,000 and there was no income recorded utilizing either the cash basis or
accrual basis method of accounting. Impaired loans at December, 1997, included
$877,000 of nonaccrual loans.
A summary of the activity within the allowance for loan losses is as
follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
Balance, beginning of year $ 2,200 $ 1,802 $ 2,253
<S> <C> <C>
Provision for loan losses 13,992 406
180
Loans charged-off (10,452) (269) (882)
Recoveries on loans previously charged-off 133
----------
261 251
--- ---
Balance, end of year $ 5,873 $2,200 $ 1,802
======= ====== = =======
</TABLE>
84
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
The Company's commercial loans as of December 31, 1999 and 1998 are
partially secured by the following collateral:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998
---- ----
<S> <C> <C>
Stock $ 4,140 $ 3,395
Cash 14,901 2,504
Furniture, equipment and/or accounts receivables 81,584 65,314
Unsecured, real estate, automobiles, or assignment
of life insurance 23,778 22,739
-------------- ----------------
-------------- ----------------
Total $ $ 93,952
===== ======= ======
124,403
</TABLE>
NOTE 5 - PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT
A summary of the major components of premises and equipment at December
31, 1999 and 1998 is as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998
------------------ -------------------
------------------ -------------------
<S> <C> <C>
Furniture, fixtures and equipment $ 3,829 $ 3,498
Leasehold improvements 1,477 1,470
----------- ----- ------------ -----
Total premises and equipment, at cost 5,306 4,968
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization (4,154) (3,578)
--------- ------- --------- -------
Net premises and equipment $ 1,152 $ 1,390
========= =========
</TABLE>
Depreciation and amortization expense related to premises and equipment
was approximately $584,000, $591,000 and $563,000 for the years ended December
31, 1999, 1998 and 1997, respectively.
NOTE 6 - DEPOSITS AND SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS
A summary of time certificates of deposit outstanding at December 31,
1999 and 1998 is as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998
------------------ ------------------
------------------ ------------------
<S> <C> <C>
Time certificates of deposit under $100,000 $ 7,222 $ 8,625
Time certificates of deposit of $100,000 and over 38,429 20,323
----------------- --------- ------
Total $ 45,651 $ 28,948
========== =========
</TABLE>
85
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
Interest expense for the years ended December 31, 1999, 1998 and 1997
relating to interest-bearing deposits and other borrowings amounted to the
following:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
<S> <C>
Interest-bearing demand deposits $ $ $ 108
101 134
Savings and money market deposits 1,801
1,758 1,821
Time certificates of deposit under $100,000 383
289 391
Time certificates of deposit of $100,000 and over 1,056
------- -----
1,110 1,017
-------------------- -----
Interest expense on deposits 3,374
------- -----
3,258 3,337
-------------------- -----
Federal funds purchased and securities sold under
agreements to repurchase 3
109
16
Convertible notes 253
---
473
------------ ---
46
--
Interest expense on deposits and other borrowings $ $ 3,630 $ 3,826
=== ======= =======
3,413
</TABLE>
The Bank sells securities under agreements to repurchase. Securities
sold under repurchase agreements are recorded as short-term obligations. During
1999, the highest daily outstanding balance and the average balance of
securities sold under agreements to repurchase was $25,000,000 and $2,166,000,
respectively; the average rate paid was 5.03%. During 1998, the highest daily
outstanding balance and the average balance of securities sold under agreements
to repurchase was $5,000,000 and $55,000, respectively; the average rate paid
was 5.50%. During 1997, the highest daily outstanding balance and the average
balance of securities sold under agreements to repurchase was $8,000,000 and
$274,000, respectively; the average rate paid was 5.77%. Securities subject to
repurchase agreements, are retained by the Company's custodian under written
agreements that recognize the customers' interests in the securities.
NOTE 7 - INCOME TAXES
The provision for income taxes for the years ended December 31, 1999,
1998 and 1997 is comprised of the following:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
Current taxes:
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Federal $ (1,533) $ 471 $ 395
State (204)
---------- -----
3 8
- -
Total current taxes (1,737)
------- -------
474 403
--- ---
Deferred taxes (credits):
Federal (1,170) 257
248
State (292)
---------- -----
259 241
--- ---
Total deferred taxes
(1,462) 516 489
------------ --- ---
Provision (benefit) for income taxes $ (3,199) $ 990 $ 892
========= ======= = =======
</TABLE>
86
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
The following summarizes the differences between the income taxes
reported for financial statement purposes and income taxes at the federal
statutory rate of 34%, in 1999, 1998 and 1997, respectively:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Tax expense at statutory rate $ (3,930) $ 827 $ 806
State franchise taxes, net of federal income tax benefit (827) 173 164
Valuation reserve 2,444 - -
Net benefit from net operating loss carry back (904) - -
Other
18 (10) (78)
-- ---- ----
Provision (benefit) for income taxes $ (3,199) $ 990 $ 892
============= ========== = =========
Effective tax rate
(27.7%) 40.9% 37.6%
======= ===== =====
</TABLE>
Included in accrued interest receivable and other assets is refundable
income taxes of $1,780,000 at December 31, 1999. Included in accrued interest
payable and other liabilities is current income taxes payable of $837,000 at
December 31, 1998.
The components of the net deferred tax asset are as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998
---- ----
Deferred tax liabilities:
<S> <C> <C>
Prepaid expenses $ 211 $ 211
State taxes
485 11
--- --
Gross deferred tax liabilities
696 222
--- ---
Deferred tax assets:
Other 82 76
Depreciation, leasing transactions, fixed asset gain or loss 251 169
Bad debt deductions 1,290 377
Deferred compensation 419 379
Core deposit amortization 20 20
Loan fee amortization 48 48
Accrued vacation 148 148
Contributions carryforward 44 9
Net operating loss carryforward 2,474 32
OREO reserve 112 -
Unrealized loss on securities available-for-sale
1,095 207
----- ---
Gross deferred tax assets 5,983
1,465
Valuation Reserve (2,444)
-------------
-
Net deferred tax asset $ 2,843 $ 1,243
=========== ==========
</TABLE>
The gross net operating loss carryforwards for federal and state income
taxes of approximately $5,583,000 and $2,910,000 begin expiring in 2019 and 2001
respectively. During the current year, a valuation allowance of $2,444,000 was
recorded to account for uncertainties related to the use of the Company's
deferred tax assets to offset future income, resulting in reduced tax benefit in
the year ended December 31, 1999. Management periodically review the factors
that may change the amount of valuation allowance as facts and circumstances
dictate. The deciding facts and circumstances causing management to establish
this reserve occurred during the fourth quarter of 1999. In assessing the
realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more
likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be
realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon the
generation of future taxable income during the periods in which those temporary
differences become deductible. Management considers the projected future taxable
income and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. Based upon the
level of historical taxable income and projections for future taxable income
over the periods in which the deferred tax assets are deductible, management
believes it is more likely than not the Company will realize all benefits
related to these deductible differences.
87
<PAGE>
NOTE 8 - SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
STOCK OPTION PLAN
- -----------------
The Company's stock option plans allow option holders to "pyramid"
their options upon exercise. Through this process, which utilizes the intrinsic
value of the options at the time of exercise, the option holders avoid incurring
additional costs. As a result, more options may be exercised than shares issued,
depending on the intrinsic value of the options at the time of exercise.
The Company has a stock option plan dated December 18, 1990 (the
"1990 Plan") as amended and restated on September 22, 1992, which authorizes the
issuance of up to 120,000 shares of the Company's unissued common stock to
directors, officers and other personnel. Option prices may not be less than 100%
of the fair market value at the date of the grant for incentive stock options
and 85% of the fair market value for non-qualified stock options. Options
granted under the 1990 Plan expire not more than ten years after the date of
grant and must be fully paid when exercised. The status of options granted under
the 1990 Plan is shown as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXERCISE WEIGHTED OPTIONS OPTIONS
PRICE ($) AVERAGE OUTSTANDING VESTED
- ---------- - -------- - ------------ ------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Outstanding at December 31, 1996 7.71 - 14.22 $ 62,603
10.54 62,603
Exercised 7.71
(1,732)
Canceled 12.92
12.92 (3,307)
Granted
-
Outstanding at December 31, 1997 7.71 - 14.22 10.54 57,564
57,564
Exercised 7.71 (40,028)
Canceled -
Granted 17.00
1,500
Outstanding at December 31, 1998 7.71 - 14.22 11.32 19,036
19,036
Exercised -
Canceled -- -
Granted 11.16 11.21 41,000
Outstanding at December 31, 1999 60,036 60,036
</TABLE>
At December 31, 1999, there were 61,862 shares available for grant
under the 1990 Plan. At December 31, 1999, stock options outstanding had 8.5
years weighted average life. Of the options outstanding at December 31, 1999 and
1998, 61,703 and 19,036, respectively, were exercisable with weighted-average
prices of $11.21 and $11.32, respectively.
88
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
The Company also has a stock option plan dated December 31, 1992 (the
"1992 Plan"), which authorizes the issuance of up to 393,750 shares of the
Company's unissued common stock to directors, officers and other personnel.
Option prices may not be less than 100% of the fair market value at the date of
the grant for incentive stock options and 85% of the fair market value for
non-qualified stock options. Options granted under the 1992 Plan expire not more
than ten years after the date of grant and must be fully paid when exercised.
The status of options granted under the 1992 Plan is shown as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXERCISE OPTIONS
PRICE OUTSTANDING VESTED
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Outstanding at December 31, 1996 and 1997 $ 12.70 358,313 358,313
============== =======
Exercised 12.70 (264,600)
---------- ---------
Outstanding at December 31, 1998 12.70 93,713 93,713
================ ======
Granted 11.16 13,500
----------------------
Outstanding at December 31, 1999 (12.57 weighted avg.) 107,213 97,047
============= ======= ============== =======
</TABLE>
At December 31, 1999, 102,213 options were exercisable at a
weighted-average exercise price per share of $12.57.
In addition, the Company also has a stock option plan dated March 25,
1998 (the "1998 Plan"), which authorizes the issuance of up to 100,000 shares of
the Company's unissued common stock to directors, officers and other personnel.
Option prices may not be less than 100% of the fair market value at the date of
the grant for incentive stock options and 85% of the fair market value for
non-qualified stock options. Options granted under the Plan expire not more than
ten years after the date of grant and must be fully paid when exercised. As of
December 31, 1999, there were no options granted or outstanding under the 1998
Plan.
The Company applies APB Opinion No. 25 in accounting for stock
options and, accordingly, no compensation expense has been recognized in the
financial statements. Had the Company determined compensation expense based on
the fair value at the grant date for its stock options under SFAS 123, the
Company's net income (loss) would approximate the pro forma amounts, indicated
below. These pro forma amounts were calculated using the Black-Scholes
option-pricing model with the assumptions indicated in the table below:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands, except per share data)
1999 1998
---- ----
<S> <C> <C>
Net income (loss) as reported $ (8,360) $ 1,432
Pro form loss a net income (loss) $ (8,659) $ 1,424
Earnings per common share
as reported (basic) $ (4.15) $ .81
Pro forma earnings per
common share (loss) $ (4.30) $ .81
Expected life (years) 5 5
Risk-free interest rate 4.86 % 4.93 %
Volatility 63.7 % 46 %
Expected dividend yield - -
</TABLE>
The weighted average grant date fair value of the options granted
during the year ended December 31, 1999 and 1998 was $10,375 and $17.00,
respectively. There were no options granted during 1997.
On February 1, 2000 60,000 options granted to two executives during
1999 were cancelled and 130,000 new options were granted with an exercise price
of $7.50 per share. The new options become 50% vested upon grant and 25% vest
annually onthe grant date until fully vested. On February 1, 2000 the exercise
price of 10,000 options granted to two employees was amended to $7.50 per share.
Of the options granted during 1999, 3,500 are contingent upon execution of a day
employee agreement.
89
<PAGE>
COMMON STOCK ISSUANCE
On May 14, 1996, the Company declared a 5% stock dividend paid on
June 21, 1996, primarily by a distribution of 64,714 treasury shares. On June
23, 1995, the Company declared a 5% stock dividend primarily paid by a
distribution of 56,274 treasury shares on July 19, 1995.
On January 19, 1993, the Company concluded a private placement offering
of 341,250 shares of common stock at a price of $12.70 per share. All but 15,225
shares were sold as of December 31, 1992. In connection with the offering,
413,438 options and 137,812 warrants were issued on December 31, 1992 and are
considered issued and outstanding. The options and warrants became exercisable
on December 31, 1994 at a price of $12.70 per share and expire on December 31,
2002. Proceeds to the Company from the offering totaled $3,559,000 as of
December 31, 1992. Additional proceeds of $182,000 were received on January 19,
1993.
In connection with the private placement, the Company issued (i) a
warrant to Robert H. Leshner, principal of the placement agent, to purchase
110,250 shares of Common Stock (the "Leshner Warrant") and (ii) a warrant to
Andrew E. Haas, which was subsequently reissued as two warrants to purchase
13,781 shares to each of Mr. Haas and Curtis Swindal, each at a purchase price
of $12.70 per share exercisable in full on or after December 31, 1994 and before
December 31, 2002. The Company agreed to grant the holders of the shares issued
upon exercise of the warrants ("Warrant Shares") the right, on two occasions
during the five-year period beginning December 31, 1994, to require the Company
to register (the "Demand Registration") the Warrant Shares under the Securities
Exchange Act of 1934 (the "Act"). The Company will pay the expenses of one
Demand Registration.
Under the terms of the Leshner Warrant, if Dr. Joel W. Kovner, former
Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of the Company, dies before
December 31, 2002, then the Company will purchase, at the option of Mr. Leshner,
some or all of the warrants and/or Warrant Shares then owned by Mr. Leshner,
provided that (i) the maximum aggregate purchase price paid by the Company shall
be not more than $1,000,000 and (ii) the funds to purchase such warrants and/or
Warrant Shares shall come solely from the proceeds of the key person life
insurance policy on Dr. Kovner. Furthermore, if at any time prior to December
31, 2002 Mr. Leshner wishes to sell some or all of the warrants and/or Warrant
Shares to a third party, Mr. Leshner must offer to sell such warrants and/or
Warrant Shares to the Company on the same terms and conditions being offered to
such third party. Another term of the Leshner Warrant restricts Company's
ability to issue certain types of preferred stock which would entitle the
holders thereof to receive dividends or distributions of assets that vary in
amount with Bancorp's performance.
NOTE 9 - COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
The Company leases its premises and certain equipment under several
noncancellable operating leases which expire on various dates through January
31, 2014. Rental expense for the years ended December 31, 1999, 1998 and 1997
amounted to approximately $1.0 million, $1.0 million and $1.1 million,
respectively.
The following is a schedule of future minimum rental commitments
required under operating leases that have initial or remaining noncancellable
lease terms in excess of one year as of December 31, 1999:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDING DECEMBER 31, (in thousands)
------------------------
<S> <C>
2000 $ 1,060
2001 967
2002 474
2003 348
2004 200
Thereafter 1,815
----------- -----
Total $ 4,864
=== =========
</TABLE>
The building lease commitments are subject to cost-of-living
adjustments to reflect future changes in the consumer price index or a fixed
periodic rate increase. Those leases with fixed periodic rate increases and/or
specified months with no rent due are amortized so that the average monthly cost
of the lease is charged each month.
90
<PAGE>
LENDING COMMITMENTS
The Company is a party to financial instruments with off-balance
sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its
clients. These financial instruments include commitments to extend credit and
standby letters of credit. These instruments involve, to varying degrees,
elements of credit and interest rate risk in excess of the amount recognized in
the consolidated balance sheet. The Bank's exposure to credit loss in the event
of nonperformance by the other party to commitments to extend credit and standby
letters of credit is represented by the contractual notional amount of those
instruments. At December 31, 1999 and 1998, the Company had commitments to
extend credit of approximately $46.7 million, $49.9 million, respectively, and
obligations under standby letters of credit of approximately $5.6 million and
$6.5 million, respectively. These commitments and obligations were variable rate
in structure.
Standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by the
Company to guarantee the performance of a client to a third party. Those
guarantees are primarily issued to support public and private borrowing
arrangements, including commercial paper, bond financing and similar
transactions. At December 31, 1999, all guarantees extended for a period of 12
months or less. The Company uses the same credit policies in making commitments
and conditional obligations as it does for extending loan facilities to clients.
The Company evaluates each client's creditworthiness on a case-by-case basis.
The amount of collateral obtained, if necessary by the Company upon an extension
of credit, is based on management's credit evaluation of the counter-party.
Collateral held varies but may include accounts receivable, inventory, property
plant and equipment and income-producing commercial real estate.
OTHER OBLIGATIONS
As part of a separation agreement, a former executive was granted a
continuation of services arrangement where the Company is obligated to pay
$150,000 per annum beginning May 2001 and continuing through May 2016. In
connection with this agreement, the Company invested in and is the beneficiary
of life insurance policy proceeds which fund this obligation and meets other
settlement requirements as discussed in Note 8. As of December 31, 1999, the
accrued liability for the salary continuation was $1.0 million and the cash
surrender value of the life insurance policies, recorded in other assets, was
$2.3 million.
NOTE 10 - TRANSACTIONS INVOLVING DIRECTORS AND AFFILIATED PARTIES
As part of its normal banking activities, the Company has extended
credit to various directors and employees and their related interest. The credit
extended to these individuals and affiliates for the two years ended December
31, is summarized as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
(in thousands) 1999 1998
---- ----
<S> <C> <C>
Balance, beginning of year $ 3,650 $ 3,711
Credit granted 1,500 293
Loan payments (2,950)
----------- -------
(354)
Balance, end of year $ 2,200 $
============== =====
3,650
</TABLE>
Interest income earned on these loans amounted to approximately
$159,400, $343,000 and $286,000 during the years 1999, 1998, and 1997,
respectively. In the opinion of management, all of the above reference
extensions of credit are on terms similar to transactions with nonaffiliated
parties and involve only normal credit risk, when initially underwritten.
Amounts included in deposits at December 31, 1999, related to directors and
affiliated parties was approximately $789,000.
91
<PAGE>
The Company and the Bank entered into a Consulting Agreement with
Network Health Financial Services, Inc. ("NHFS"), a California Corporation for
which Melinda McIntyre-Kolpin serves as Chief Executive Officer. Pursuant to the
Consulting Agreement, NHFS provides consulting services to the Company and the
Bank with respect to personnel matters, operational procedures and client
development and retention. NHFS is paid its actual costs incurred in the
performance of its duties under the Consulting Agreement (including hourly rates
for certain specified NHFS personnel while they are performing consulting
services), plus an additional 25% of such costs. In addition, the Bancorp and
Bank pay flat monthly rates for the services of Ms. McIntyre-Kolpin and Ms.
Patti Derry. During 1999, the Bancorp and the Bank paid NHFS total fees in the
amount of approximately $644,000 pursuant to the Consulting Agreement. Either
party may terminate the Consulting Agreement by giving 30 days notice to the
other party. The Company and the Bank terminated the Consulting Agreement on
March 6, 2000.
NOTE 11 - CAPITAL ADEQUACY AND RESTRICTIONS ON DIVIDEND PAYMENTS
The Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (the "OCC"), the Bank's
primary regulator, has established minimum leverage ratio guidelines for
national banks. These guidelines provide for a minimum Tier 1 capital leverage
ratio (Tier 1 capital to adjusted total assets) of 3.0% for national banks that
meet certain specified criteria, including having the highest regulatory rating.
All other national banks will generally be required to maintain a minimum Tier 1
capital leverage ratio of 3.0% plus an additional 100 to 200 basis points.
The Federal Reserve Board, as the Company's primary regulator, has
similarly established minimum leverage ratio guidelines for bank holding
companies. These guidelines also provide for a minimum Tier 1 leverage ratio of
3.0% for bank holding companies that meet certain specified criteria, including
having the highest regulatory rating. All other bank holding companies will
generally be required to maintain a minimum Tier 1 capital leverage ratio of
3.0% plus an additional 100 to 200 basis points. The Federal Reserve Board has
not advised the Company of any specific minimum Tier 1 capital leverage ratio
applicable to it. Under risk-based capital standards, banking organizations are
expected to meet a minimum ratio for qualifying total capital to risk-weighted
assets of 8.0%, 4.0% of which must be Tier 1 capital.
The Federal Deposit Insurance Act of 1991 contains "prompt correction
action" provisions pursuant to which insured depository institutions are to be
classified into one of five categories based primarily upon capital adequacy,
ranging from "well capitalized" to "critically undercapitalized" and which
require, subject to certain exceptions, the appropriate federal banking agency
to take prompt corrective action with respect to an institution which becomes
"undercapitalized" and to take additional actions if the institution becomes
"significantly undercapitalized" or "critically undercapitalized."
The following table sets forth the minimum required regulatory
capital ratios for a bank holding company and bank, and various regulatory
capital ratios of the Company and the Bank at December 31, 1999.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
TO BE WELL
CAPITALIZED UNDER
FOR CAPITAL PROMPT CORRECTIVE
ACTUAL ADEQUACY PURPOSES ACTION PROVISIONS
---------------------------- ------------------------------- ------------------------------
(in thousands) AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
COMPANY
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Leverage $ 14,972 5.21 % $ 11,494 4.00 % $ 14,368 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 14,972 8.97 6,675 4.00 10,013 6.00
Total Risk-Based 17,784 10.66 13,350 8.00 16,688 10.00
BANK
Leverage $ 13,786 4.81 % $ 11,457 4.00 % $ 14,321 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 13,786 8.18 6,741 4.00 10,112 6.00
Total Risk-Based 15,939 9.46 13,482 8.00 16,853 10.00
</TABLE>
92
<PAGE>
The following table sets forth the minimum required regulatory
capital ratios for a bank holding company and bank, and various regulatory
capital ratios of the Company and the Bank at December 31, 1998.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
TO BE WELL
CAPITALIZED UNDER
FOR CAPITAL PROMPT CORRECTIVE
ACTUAL ADEQUACY PURPOSES ACTION PROVISIONS
---------------------------- ------------------------------ -------------------------------
(in thousands) AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
COMPANY
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Leverage $ 25,592 9.59 % $ 10,677 4.00 % $ 13,346 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 25,592 17.31 5,914 4.00 8,872 6.00
Total Risk-Based 28,561 19.32 11,829 8.00 14,786 10.00
BANK
Leverage $ 22,297 8.37 % $ 10,661 4.00 % $ 13,326 5.00 %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 22,297 15.12 5,899 4.00 8,848 6.00
Total Risk-Based 24,145 16.37 11,797 8.00 14,747 10.00
</TABLE>
Under federal banking law, dividends declared by the Bank in any
calendar year may not, without the approval of the OCC, exceed its net earnings,
as defined, for that year combined with its retained net earnings for the
preceding two years. Dividends declared may not exceed amounts necessary to
satisfy the aforementioned capital requirements. As of December 31, 1999, the
Bank could not declare dividends without obtaining regulatory approval.
Federal banking law also restricts the Bank from extending credit to
the Company in excess of 10% of the capital stock and surplus, as defined. Any
such extensions of credit are subject to strict collateral requirements.
The OCC conducted an examination in 1999 and determined that the Bank
required special supervisory attention. To implement this corrective action, the
OCC and the Bank entered into a formal agreement on March 22, 2000, which
requires the Bank to: maintain certain regulatory capital levels; appoint a full
time president and a full time senior lending officer; establish a loan workout
department; implement an overdraft policy; improve the management of the loan
portfolio; establish an independent loan review system; immediately take action
to protect the Bank's interest in criticized assets; establish an organizational
structure with clear lines of authority for the CEO and President; develop a
conflict of interest policy which includes relationships with officers,
directors and consultants; develop a three year strategic plan; develop a profit
plan to improve and sustain earnings and a capital plan to meet and maintain a
well capitalized regulatory requirements. The agreement also establishes a
schedule for compliance and requires additional regulatory reporting by the
Bank.
93
<PAGE>
The following table sets forth the capital ratios for the bank, at December 31,
1999 and the required ratios by September 30, 2000:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
REQUIRED BY THE EXCESS
ACTUAL FORMAL AGREEMENT (DEFICIENCY)
--------------------------------- ---------------------------- -----------------------------
(in thousands) AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO AMOUNT RATIO
------ ----- ------ ----- ------ -----
BANK
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Leverage $ 13,786 4.81 % $ 14,321 5.00 % $ (535) (.19) %
Tier 1 Risk-Based 13,786 8.18 10,112 6.00 3,674 2.18
Total Risk-Based 15,939 9.46 16,853 10.00 (914) (.54)
</TABLE>
NOTE 12 - CONVERTIBLE NOTES
On June 19, 1994, the Company completed a public offering of
$5,750,000 in convertible subordinated reset notes (the "Notes") which mature on
March 1, 2004 and incurred expenses of $1,205,000. Interest on the Notes is
payable semiannually on March 1 and September 1 of each year, commencing on
September 1, 1994 at the rate of 8.50% per annum until March 1, 1998, and from
March 2, 1998 until the principal thereof is paid or made available for payment
at a rate of 7.21% per annum, or the Reference Rate (as defined below) plus 150
basis points. The "Reference Rate" is the most recent "Five Year Constant
Treasury Maturity Index" published by the Federal Reserve Bank, or its
successor, at least 60 days prior to March 2, 1998. The Notes are convertible
into common stock of the Company at any time prior to maturity, unless
previously redeemed, at a conversion price of $12.6984 per share, subject to
adjustment in certain events. The Notes are redeemable in whole or in part at
the option of the Company at any time on or after March 2, 1998 at the
redemption prices set, subject to the prior approval of the Board of Governors
of the Federal Reserve System. During 1999, $437,000 of the notes were converted
into 34,410 common stock shares. During 1998, $4,321,000 of the Notes were
converted into 334,494 common stock shares. During 1997, $180,000 of the Notes
were converted into 14,174 common stock shares. During 1996, $2,000 of the Notes
were converted into 157 common stock shares. During 1995, $131,000 of the Notes
were converted into 10,316 common stock shares. If all $679,000 of the remaining
Notes were converted into common stock, 53,471 shares of common stock would be
issued.
NOTE 13 - DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The Company had only limited involvement with derivative financial
instruments and did not use them for trading purposes. They are used to manage
well-defined interest rate price risks. The Company was not a party to any
derivative financial instruments as of December 31, 1999.
Interest rate floor and cap agreements are used to reduce the
potential impact of changes in interest rates which would reduce the interest
income and/or market value on loans and on certain securities. The Company
entered into three interest rate floor agreements during December 1994 and
January 1995 for a total notional amount of $60 million. The agreements entitled
the Company to receive from counterparties on a monthly basis the amounts, if
any, by which the one-month London Interbank Offered Rate ("LIBOR") falls below
6%. The floor agreements were for a period of three years. The average premium
paid for the floor agreements was approximately 20 basis points or $120,000 and
was being amortized over three years. In May 1995, the Company sold the floor
contracts for total consideration of $722,500. This amount is being amortized
over the original three year term. In 1997, net interest income was increased
approximately $235,000, as a result of the interest rate floor agreements.
In December 1995, the Company entered into two interest rate cap
agreements for a notional amount of $10 million each. The agreements entitle the
Company to receive from counterparties on a quarterly basis the amounts, if any,
by which the one year Constant Maturity Treasury Index ("CMT") rises above 6.50%
on a $10 million notional amount and 6.75% on a $10 million notional amount. The
cap agreements are for a period of three years and expired December 1998. The
average premium paid for the cap agreements was approximately 63.5 basis points
or $127,000 and is being amortized over three years. Net interest income in
1999, 1998 and 1997 was decreased by the interest rate caps by approximately
$1,600, $40,000 and $42,000, respectively.
94
<PAGE>
The Company uses interest rate swap agreements for the purpose of
synthetically altering the interest rates on a portion of the Bank's super NOW
and money market accounts. In January 1993, the Company entered into two
interest rate swap agreements that paid the Company a fixed rate of 7.21% for
three years beginning in January 1993, while the Company paid the prime rate.
These swaps had a total notional amount of $40 million and terminated in January
1996. Net interest income for 1996 and 1995 was reduced by the two swaps by
approximately $15,000 and $694,000, respectively. In November 1993, the Bank
entered into a swap with a notional amount of $15 million to synthetically alter
interest rates on a portion of the Bank's super NOW and money market accounts.
The effective date of the swap is May 26, 1994 and covers a period of five years
ending in May 1999. Under the terms of the swap, the Bank pays a rate of prime
less 190 basis points while receiving the three-month LIBOR. The rate the Bank
pays adjusts daily while the rate the Bank receives adjusts quarterly. The terms
of the swap originally included an interest rate cap, which was terminated in
1994, and an expense of approximately $385,000 was recorded. Net interest income
was reduced by the swap by approximately $32,000 and $134,000 in 1999 and 1998,
each year, respectively.
The Company is exposed to potential credit losses in the event of
nonperformance by the counterparties to its interest rate floor agreements,
interest rate swap agreements and nonderivative financial assets, but has no
off-balance-sheet credit risk of accounting loss. The Company anticipates,
however, that counterparties will be able to fully satisfy their obligations
under the contracts. The Company does not obtain collateral or other security to
support the financial instruments subject to credit risk but monitors the credit
standing of counterparties.
NOTE 14 - FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The estimated fair value amounts have been determined by the Bank
using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies.
However, considerable judgment is required to interpret market data to develop
the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented herein are not
necessarily indicative of the amounts the Bank could realize in a current market
exchange. The use of different market assumptions and/or estimation
methodologies may have a material effect on the estimated fair value amounts.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
DECEMBER 31, 1999 DECEMBER 31, 1998
---------------------------------------- ------------------------------------
CARRYING ESTIMATED CARRYING ESTIMATED
(in thousands) VALUE FAIR VALUE VALUE FAIR VALUE
------ - ----------- - ------ - ----------
Assets:
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Cash and cash equivalents $ 43,419 $ 43,419 $ 31,965 $ 31,965
Securities available-for-sale 45,525 45,525 80,891 80,891
Securities held-to-maturity 18,200 17,901 24,081 24,135
Loans, net 156,484 156,206 115,519 116,091
Liabilities:
Noninterest-bearing transaction accounts 109,560 109,560 109,422 109,422
Interest-bearing transaction accounts 16,033 16,033 16,710 16,710
Savings and money market accounts 84,783 84,783 75,501 75,501
Certificates of deposit and other time deposits 45,651 45,666 28,948 28,799
Convertible notes 679 679 1,116 1,051
</TABLE>
95
<PAGE>
The carrying values of cash and cash equivalents reported in the
balance sheet approximate fair values due to the short-term nature of the
assets. The fair value of marketable securities and interest rate swaps and caps
is based on quoted market prices, dealer quotes, and prices obtained from
independent pricing services. The fair values of loans are estimated using
discounted cash flow analysis. The analysis was performed on a loan-by-loan
basis by projecting each loan's expected cash flows and discounting these flows
at appropriate discount rates. The expected cash flows were determined by
contractually scheduled payments of principal and interest, incorporating
scheduled rate adjustments, periodic caps, and lifetime ceilings and floors for
adjustable loans. The fair values are based on a stable interest rate scenario
and do not incorporate bid-ask spreads or discounts that might be required to
dispose of assets in bulk. Discount rates applied to the expected cash flows
were based on the Bank's offer rates for new loans with similar collateral and
terms, adjusted to reflect differential risk based on collateral value, payment
status, and/or credit classification at December 31, 1999 and 1998,
respectively.
96
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
The fair value of deposits with no defined maturities, such as demand
deposits, money market deposits and savings accounts, is the amount payable on
demand at the valuation date. For deposit liabilities with defined maturities,
such as time certificates of deposit, estimation of fair value was based on the
discounted value of future cash flows expected to be paid, where the discount
rate was the Bank's offer rate for similar deposits with maturities equivalent
to the remaining terms on the deposits being valued at December 31, 1999 and
1998, respectively.
Standby letters of credit principally support corporate obligations
and include $1.5 million and $395,000 that was collateralized with cash at
December 31, 1999 and 1998, respectively. At December 31, 1999, $5.6 million of
the standby letters of credit and $37.2 million of other lending commitments
expire within one year. The estimated fair value of lending commitments and
letters of credit is estimated using fees currently charged for similar
arrangements, adjusted for changes in interest rates and credit that occurred
subsequent to origination.
The fair value estimates presented herein are based on pertinent
information available to management as of December 31, 1999 and 1998. Although
management is not aware of any factors that would significantly affect the
estimated fair value amounts, such amounts have not been comprehensively
revalued for purposes of these financial statements since those dates and,
therefore, current estimates of fair value may differ significantly from the
amounts presented herein.
NOTE 15 - EARNINGS PER SHARE
The following table illustrates the computation of basic and diluted
earnings per share:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
1999 1998 1997
---- ---- ----
Net earnings (loss) used for earnings per
<S> <C> <C> <C>
share computation: $ (8,359,763) $ 1,431,599 $ 1,478,525
Interest savings on conversion of convertible
notes, net of income taxes 149,200
------------------------------- -------
(A) 279,435
-------------------------------- -------
Diluted earnings (loss) $ (8,359,763) $ 1,580,799 $ 1,757,960
============== ============ = ============
Denominator for basic earnings per share -
weighted average number of shares
outstanding 2,015,226 1,768,663
1,345,972
Effect of dilutive securities:
Warrants and Options (a) 125,596
33,835
Convertible notes
(A) 253,942 428,164
--- ------- -------
Denominator for diluted earnings per share 2,015,226 2,148,201
=================== ===================
22,739
Basic earnings (loss) per share $ (4.15) $ 0.81 $ 1.10
============ ========== = ==========
Diluted earnings (loss) per share a $ (4.15) $ 0.74 $ 0.97
============ = =========== = ==========
<FN>
(a) No effect has been given to dilutive securities because the impact is
anti-dilutive.
</FN>
</TABLE>
97
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
NOTE 16 - PARENT COMPANY INFORMATION
The Bancorp has met its obligations principally from the payment of
dividends from the Bank. As of December 31, 1999, the Bank was unable to pay
dividends without obtaining regulatory approval.
The following financial information represents the balance sheets of
the Bancorp as of December 31, 1999 and 1998, the related statements of
operations and of cash flows for the three-year period ended December 31, 1999.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
BALANCE SHEETS
DECEMBER 31, 1999 AND 1998
1999 1998
-------------- ---------------
(in thousands)
Assets:
<S> <C> <C>
Cash in First Professional Bank, N.A. $ 433 $ 3,276
Investment in First Professional Bank, N.A. 16,303 22,296
Loans 865
244
Accrued interest receivable and other assets
673 708
--- ---
$ 18,274 $ 26,524
========= = ========
Liabilities:
Accrued interest payable and other liabilities 65 $ 77
Convertible notes 679 1,116
Other liabilities
- 10
- --
Total liabilities 744 1,203
Shareholders' equity
17,530 25,321
------ ------
$ 18,274 $ 26,524
========= = ========
</TABLE>
98
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1999, 1998 AND 1997
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1999 1998 1997
------------ -------------- --------------
(in thousands)
Income:
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Cash dividends from First Professional Bank, N.A. $ - $ - $ 425
Interest 80 15
7
Other
14 4 4
-- - -
Total income
94 19 436
-- -- ---
Expenses:
Interest 46 253
474
Salaries and employer taxes 34 22
31
Amortization of convertible note expenses 16 69
104
Legal fees, net of legal settlement 209 218
(481)
Other professional services 49 117
67
Other
75 11 1
-- -- -
Total expenses
429 690 196
--- --- ---
Provision for Loan Loss (660) - -
Earnings (loss) before income taxes and equity in
undistributed net earnings of First Professional Bank, N.A. (995) (671)
240
Provision for income taxes
- - -
Earnings before equity in undistributed net earnings of
First Professional Bank, N.A. (995) (671)
240
Equity in undistributed net (loss) earnings of First
Professional Bank, N.A. (7,365)
-------------
2,103 1,239
----- -----
Net (loss) earnings $ (8,360) $ 1,432 $ 1,479
========= ======== = ========
</TABLE>
99
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1999, 1998 AND 1997
1999 1998 1997
------------- ---------------- ---------------
(in thousands)
Cash flows from operating activities:
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Net earnings (loss) $ (8,360) $ 1,432 $ 1,479
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash
provided by (used in) operating activities:
(Increase) decrease in accrued interest receivable and other assets 34 (39)
(14)
(Decrease) increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities (22) (186)
(6)
(Decrease) in deferred taxes - 69
104
Equity in undistributed (earnings) loss of First Professional
Bank, N.A. (2,103) (1,239)
-------- ------ ------- --------------
7,365
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities (827)
-------- --------- -----
(983) 324
----- ---
Cash flows from investing activities:
Advance from FPB 400 - -
Net decrease (increase) in loans (144)
----------- --------- -----
(621) -
----- -
Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities (144)
----------- --------- -----
(221) -
----- -
Cash flows from financing activities:
Capital infusion into FPB (1,500) - -
Proceeds from exercise of convertible notes (38) 3,794
14
Dividends paid (185)
----------- ---------------
(101) -
----- -
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities 3,609
-------- --------- -----
(1,639) 14
------- --
Net increase (decrease) in cash (2,843) 2,638
338
Cash, beginning of year 638
----------- ---------------
3,276 300
----- ---
Cash, end of year $ 433 $ 3,276 $ 638
======== ========= =======
Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information - cash paid during the year
for:
Interest $ 58 $ 381 $ 474
</TABLE>
100
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
NOTE 17 - QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (UNAUDITED)
The following tables set forth the Company unaudited data regarding
operations for each quarter of 1999, 1998 and 1997. This information, in the
opinion of management, includes all normal recurring adjustments necessary to
state fairly the information set forth therein. The operating results for any
quarter are not necessarily indicative of results for any future period.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
QUARTER ENDED
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DEC. 31, SEPT. 30, JUNE 30, MAR. 31, DEC. 31, SEPT. 30,
(in thousands, except per share data) 1999 1999 1999 1999 1998 1998
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Interest income $ 4,755 $ 4,801 $ 4,419 $ 4,321 $ 4,476 $ 4,343
Interest expense 950 864 750 849 1,040 793
Net interest income 3,805 3,937 3,669 3,472 3,437 3,550
Provision for loan losses 8,395 4,426 1,047 125 406 -
Gains (losses) on securities:
Available-for-sale - - 4 36 3 -
Other income 431 458 443 481 387 418
Other expenses 3,820 3,582 3,605 3,294 2,702 3,096
Earnings (loss) before income taxes (7,979) (3,613) (536) 570 719 872
Net earnings (loss) (6,073) (2,363) (259) 336 392 512
Earnings (loss) per share (as restated):
Basic (3.00) (1.17) (.13) .17 0.20 0.26
Diluted (3.00)(a) (1.17)(a) (.13)(a) .16 0.18 0.22
QUARTER ENDED
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
JUNE 30, MAR. 31, DEC. 31, SEPT. 30, JUNE 30, MAR. 31,
(in thousands, except per share data) 1998 1998 1997 1997 1997 1997
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Interest income $ 4,120 $ 4,009 $ 4,375 $ 4,168 $ 4,148 $4,019
Interest expense 896 901
1,044 965 896 921
Net interest income 3,224 3,108
3,331 3,203 3,252 3,098
Provision for loan losses -
- 60 60 60
Gains (losses) on securities:
Available-for-sale (9) -
- - - -
Other income 469 467
368 455 541 428
Other expenses 3,296 3,133
2,453 3,325 3,202 3,144
Earnings (loss) before income taxes 388 442
1,246 273 531 322
Net earnings (loss) 224 304
778 199 312 190
Earnings (loss) per share (as restated):
Basic 0.13 0.22
0.49 0.15 0.23 0.14
Diluted 0.13 0.17
0.45 0.15 0.23 0.14
<FN>
(a) No effect has been given to dilutive securities because the impact is
anti-dilutive
</FN>
</TABLE>
101
<PAGE>
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
In the third and fourth quarter of 1999, the Company added $4,400,000
and $8,400,000, respectively, to the allowance for loan losses in recognition
that the quality of certain loans had deteriorated and to provide protection
against future potential losses.
Earnings (loss) per share is based on the weighted average number of
shares outstanding during each period. Full-year weighted average shares differ
from quarterly weighted average shares and, therefore annual earnings (loss) per
share may not equal the sum of the quarters.
102
EXHIBIT 10.21
FIRST AMENDMENT TO EXECUTIVE EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
This First Amendment to Executive Employment Agreement is made
effective as of the 1st day of February, 2000 among FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK,
N.A. (the "Bank") and PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC. ("PBI") (PBI and the Bank being
collectively referred to herein as "Employer") and Gene Gaines (Executive").
RECITALS
WHEREAS, the Bank and Executive entered into an Employment Agreement
dated effective as of the 21st day of October, 1999 (the "Employment
Agreement"); and
WHEREAS, PBI now desires to also employ Executive, and PBI, the Bank
and Executive desire to amend the Employment Agreement in certain respects.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing promises and the
terms covenants and conditions that are set forth herein, the parties hereto
agree as follows:
1. SECTION 3. The first sentence of Section 3 of the Employment Agreement is
hereby amended to read as follows:
"Effective as of the date hereof, Executive shall serve as
the Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of both PBI and
the Bank and shall perform the duties and the responsibilities set
forth in Exhibit A attached hereto and incorporated herein by
reference and shall have the authority and perform such other duties,
services and responsibilities incident in such positions as are
customary of the Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of
a bank and a bank holding company, and such other reasonable duties
and responsibilities that are determined from time to time by the
Boards of Directors of the Bank and PBI (collectively, the "Board")."
2. SECTION 4(A). The first sentence of Section 4(a) of the Employment Agreement
is hereby amended to read as follows:
"Effective February 1, 2000, Executive shall receive an
annual base salary of Two Hundred Thousand Dollars ($200,000) during
the remainder of the Term (the "Annual Base Salary"), payable in
equally, bi-weekly installments."
3. SECTION 4(C). Section 4(c) is hereby amended and restated in its entirety to
read as follows:
"(c) STOCK OPTIONS. Effective February 1, 2000, the options
to purchase 30,000 shares of PBI's common stock granted to Executive
on November 1, 1999 are cancelled. In consideration of Executive
agreeing to enter into this First Amendment to Executive Employment
<PAGE>
Agreement, PBI shall grant to Executive, effective February 1, 2000,
stock options to purchase 100,000 shares of PBI. Of these options, as
many thereof as possible shall be incentive stock options (as
permitted by the applicable plan), and the remainder shall be
non-qualified options. The options shall vest as follows: (i) options
to purchase 50,000 shares shall vest immediately on the effective
date hereof, (ii) options to purchase 25,000 shares shall vest on
February 1, 2001, and (iii) the remaining options to purchase 25,000
shares shall vest on February 1, 2002. The exercise price of the
options shall be the average of the closing sales prices of the
shares of PBI during the 30 day period immediately preceding February
1, 2000."
4. RATIFICATION. The remainder of the Employment Agreement is hereby ratified in
all respects.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this First Amendment has been executed by
Executive and by duly authorized officers of the Bank and PBI effective as of
the date first written above.
/s/ Gene Gaines
___________________________________ FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
Gene Gaines, Executive
By: /s/ Terry Hartshorn
Title: Vice Chairman
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC.
By: /s/ Terry Hartshorn
Title:Vice Chairman
EXHIBIT 10.22
FIRST AMENDMENT TO EXECUTIVE EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
This First Amendment to Executive Employment Agreement is made
effective as of the 1st day of February, 2000 among FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK,
N.A. (the "Bank") and PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC. ("PBI") (PBI and the Bank being
collectively referred to herein as "Employer") and Larry Patapoff (Executive").
RECITALS
WHEREAS, Employer and Executive entered into an Employment Agreement
dated effective as of the 1st day of November, 1999 (the "Employment
Agreement"); and
WHEREAS, Employer and Executive desire to amend the Employment
Agreement in certain respects.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing promises and the
terms covenants and conditions that are set forth herein, the parties hereto
agree as follows:
1. SECTION 3. The first sentence of Section 3 of the Employment Agreement is
hereby amended to read as follows:
"Effective as of the date hereof, Executive shall serve as
the Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of PBI and
Executive Vice President, Chief Operating Officer and Chief Financial
Officer of the Bank and shall perform the duties and the
responsibilities set forth in Exhibit A attached hereto and
incorporated herein by reference and shall have the authority and
perform such other duties, services and responsibilities incident in
such positions as are customary of such offices of a bank and a bank
holding company, and such other reasonable duties and
responsibilities that are determined from time to time by the Boards
of Directors of the Bank and PBI (collectively, the "Board")."
2. SECTION 4(A). The first sentence of Section 4(a) of the Employment Agreement
is hereby amended to read as follows:
"Effective February 1, 2000, Executive shall receive an
annual base salary of One Hundred Sixty Thousand Dollars ($160,000)
during the remainder of the Term (the "Annual Base Salary"), payable
in equally, bi-weekly installments."
3. SECTION 4(C). Section 4(c) is hereby amended and restated in its entirety to
read as follows:
"(c) STOCK OPTIONS. Effective February 1, 2000, the options
to purchase 10,000 shares of PBI's common stock granted to Executive
on November 1, 1999 are cancelled. In consideration of Executive
<PAGE>
agreeing to enter into this First Amendment to Executive Employment
Agreement, PBI shall grant to Executive, effective February 1, 2000,
stock options to purchase 30,000 shares of PBI. Of these options, as
many thereof as possible shall be incentive stock options (as
permitted by the applicable plan), and the remainder shall be
non-qualified options. The options shall vest as follows: (i) options
to purchase 15,000 shares shall vest immediately on the effective
date hereof, (ii) options to purchase 7,500 shares shall vest on
February 1, 2001, and (iii) the remaining options to purchase 7,500
shares shall vest on February 1, 2002. The exercise price of the
options shall be the average of the closing sales prices of the
shares of PBI during the 30 day period immediately preceding February
1, 2000."
4. SECTION 4(D). Section 4(d) of the Employment Agreement is hereby amended and
restated to read as follows:
"(d) SEVERANCE. If during the two-year period beginning on
the date of this Agreement, (i) PBI or the Bank sells all or
substantially all of its assets to, or merges with, a third party,
AND (ii) Executive's employment is terminated thereafter (within such
two-year period) by Employer for other than Cause or the death or
Incapacity of Executive or by Executive for Good Reason, then
Employer will continue to pay Executive the monthly base salary that
he is earning at the time of such termination for a period of twelve
months following the Date of Termination."
5. RATIFICATION. The remainder of the Employment Agreement is hereby ratified in
all respects.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this First Amendment has been executed by
Executive and by duly authorized officers of the Bank and PBI effective as of
the date first written above.
/s/ Larry Patapoff
___________________________________ FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
Larry Patapoff, Executive
By:/s/ Terry Hartshorn
Title: Vice Chairman
PROFESSIONAL BANCORP, INC.
By: /s/ Terry Hartshorn
Title: Vice Chairman
EXHIBIT 10.23
AGREEMENT BY AND BETWEEN
First Professional Bank, N. A.,
Santa Monica, California
and
The Office of the Comptroller of the Currency
First Professional Bank, N. A., Santa Monica, California (Bank) and
the Comptroller of the Currency of the United States of America (Comptroller)
wish to protect the interests of the depositors, other customers, and
shareholders of the Bank, and, toward that end, wish the Bank to operate safely
and soundly and in accordance with all applicable laws, rules and regulations.
The Comptroller, through his National Bank Examiner, has examined the
Bank, and his findings are contained in the Report of Examination, dated
November 8, 1999 (ROE).
In consideration of the above premises, it is agreed, between the
Bank, by and through its duly elected and acting Board of Directors (Board), and
the Comptroller, through his authorized representative, that the Bank shall
operate at all times in compliance with the articles of this Agreement.
Article I
JURISDICTION
------------
(1) This Agreement shall be construed to be a "written agreement
entered into with the agency" within the meaning of 12 U.S.C.ss.1818(b)(1).
(2) This Agreement shall be construed to be a "written agreement
between such depository institution and such agency" within the meaning of 12
U.S.C.ss.1818(e)(1) and 12 U.S.C.ss.1818(i)(2).
(3) This Agreement shall be construed to be a "formal written
agreement" within the meaning of 12 C.F.R.ss. 5.51(c)(6)(ii). SEE 12
U.S.C.ss.1831i.
(4) This Agreement shall be construed to be a "written agreement"
within the meaning of 12 U.S.C.ss.1818(u)(1)(A).
<PAGE>
(5) All reports or plans which the Bank or Board has agreed to submit
to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller pursuant to this Agreement shall be
forwarded to the:
Assistant Deputy Comptroller
Southern California - North Field Office
Comptroller of the Currency
550 North Brand Boulevard, Suite 500
Glendale, California 91203
Article II
COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE
--------------------
(1) Within thirty (30) days, the Board shall appoint a Compliance
Committee of at least five (5) directors, of which no more than two (2) shall be
employees of the Bank or any of its affiliates (as the term "affiliate" is
defined in 12 U.S.C.ss.371c(b)(1)), or a family member of any such person. Upon
appointment, the names of the members of the Compliance Committee shall be
submitted in writing to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller. The Compliance
Committee shall be responsible for monitoring and coordinating the Bank's
adherence to the provisions of this Agreement.
(2) The Compliance Committee shall meet at least monthly.
(3) Within sixty (60) days of the appointment of the Committee and
quarterly thereafter, the Compliance Committee shall submit a written progress
report to the Board setting forth in detail:
(a) actions taken to comply with each Article of this
Agreement; and
(b) the results of those actions.
(4) The Board shall forward a copy of the Compliance Committee's
report, with any additional comments by the Board, to the Assistant Deputy
Comptroller.
2
<PAGE>
Article III
PRESIDENT
---------
(1) Within ninety (90) days. the Board shall appoint a capable,
full-time and permanent president who shall be vested with sufficient executive
authority to fulfill the duties and responsibilities of the position and ensure
the safe and sound operation of the Bank.
(2) Prior to the appointment of any individual to the position of
president, the Board shall submit to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller the
following information:
(a) the information sought in the "Changes in Directors
and Senior Executive Officers" booklet of the
Comptroller's Corporate Manual, dated April 1998, for
the proposed individual;
(b) a written statement of the Board's reasons for
selecting the proposed individual: and
(c) a written description of the proposed individual's
duties and responsibilities.
(3) The Assistant Deputy Comptroller shall have the power of veto
over the employment of the proposed president. However, the failure to exercise
such veto power shall not constitute an approval or endorsement of the proposed
officer.
(4) The requirement to submit information and the prior veto
provisions of this Article are based on the authority of 12 U.S.C. ss. 181 8(b)
and do not require the Comptroller to complete his review and act on any such
information or authority within ninety (90) days.
3
<PAGE>
Article IV
SENIOR LENDING OFFICER
----------------------
(1) Within ninety (90) days, the Board shall appoint a capable,
full-time and permanent senior lending officer who shall be vested with
sufficient executive authority to fulfill the duties and responsibilities of the
position and ensure the safe and sound operation of the Bank.
(2) Prior to the appointment of any individual to the senior lending
officer position, the Board shall submit to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller the
following information:
(a) the information sought in the "Changes in Directors and
Senior Executive Officers" booklet of the Comptroller's
Corporate Manual, dated April 1998, for the proposed
individual;
(b) a written statement of the Board's reasons for selecting
the proposed individual; and
(c) a written description of the proposed individual's duties
and responsibilities.
(3) The Assistant Deputy Comptroller shall have the power of veto
over the employment of the proposed senior lending officer. However, the failure
to exercise such veto power shall not constitute an approval or endorsement of
the proposed officer.
(4) The requirement to submit information and the prior veto
provisions of this Article are based on the authority of 12 U.S.C. ss. 181 8(b)
and do not require the Comptroller to complete his review and act on any such
information or authority within ninety (90) days.
4
<PAGE>
Article V
LOAN WORKOUT DEPARTMENT
-----------------------
(1) Within ninety (90) days, the Board shall establish a Loan Workout
Department for the purpose of restoring and reclaiming classified assets,
consistent with OCC Banking Circular 255, including commercial real estate
loans.
(2) The Loan Workout Department shall take all steps necessary to
improve the operation of the Bank's workout function including, but not limited
to:
(a) the establishment of policies and procedures to
distinguish assets that should be managed by the
Loan Workout Department from assets that should
be managed by the originating unit;
(b) the establishment of policies and procedures to require
assets that remain with the originating unit are managed
according to the standards of the Loan Workout Department;
(c) the development and implementation of management
information systems to track workloads and staffing
requirements within the Loan Workout Department; and
(d) the development and implementation of management
information systems to measure the success of workout
activities.
(3) Upon completion, a copy of the policies and procedures required
in paragraph (2) shall be forwarded to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for
review and approval.
(4) The Board shall ensure that the Loan Workout Department receives
staffing and funding support necessary to maintain its sound operation.
5
<PAGE>
Article VI
OVERDRAFT POLICY
----------------
(1) The Board shall immediately implement, and thereafter ensure Bank
adherence to, a written policy concerning the extension of overdrafts that shall
include, at a minimum:
(a) conditions and circumstances under which overdrafts will be
allowed, taking into consideration the Bank's loss
experience with prior overdrafts;
(b) charges that will be levied against depositors using
overdrafts;
(c) conditions and circumstances under which overdrafts will be
permitted to principal shareholders or the related
interests (as that term is defined in 12 C.F.R. Part 215)
of executive officers, directors or principal shareholders;
and
(d) conditions and circumstances under which overdrafts will be
charged off.
(2) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of, and adherence to, the policy
developed pursuant to this Article.
Article VII
LOAN PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
-------------------------
(1) The Board shall, within ninety (90) days, develop, implement, and thereafter
ensure Bank adherence to a written program to improve the Bank's loan portfolio
management. The program shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) procedures to ensure satisfactory and perfected collateral
documentation;
<PAGE>
(b) procedures to ensure that extensions of credit are granted,
by renewal or otherwise, to any borrower only after
obtaining and analyzing current and satisfactory credit
information;
(c) procedures to ensure conformance with loan approval
requirements;
(d) a system to track and analyze exceptions;
(e) procedures to ensure conformance with Call Report
instructions;
(f) procedures to ensure the accuracy of internal management
information systems:
(g) a performance appraisal process, including performance
appraisals, job descriptions, and incentive programs for
loan officers, which adequately consider their performance
relative to policy compliance, documentation standards,
accuracy in credit grading, and other loan administration
matters; and
(h) procedures to track and analyze concentrations of credit,
significant economic factors, and general conditions and
their impact on the credit quality of the Bank's loan and
lease portfolios.
(2) Upon completion, a copy of the program shall be forwarded to the
Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review and approval.
(3) Within ninety (90) days, the Board shall develop, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to systems that provide for effective
monitoring of:
(a) early problem loan identification to assure the timely
identification and rating of loans and leases based on
lending officer submissions;
<PAGE>
(b) statistical records that will serve as a basis for
identifying sources of problem loans and leases by
industry, size, collateral, division, group, indirect
dealer, and individual lending officer;
(c) previously charged-off assets and their recovery potential;
(d) compliance with the Bank's lending policies and laws,
rules, and regulations pertaining to the Bank's lending
function;
(e) adequacy of credit and collateral documentation; and
(f) concentrations of credit.
(4) Beginning March 31, 2000, on a quarterly basis management shall
provide the Board with written reports including, at a minimum, the following
information:
(a) the identification, type, rating, and amount of problem
loans and leases;
(b) the identification and amount of delinquent loans and
leases;
(c) credit and collateral documentation exceptions;
(d) the identification and status of credit related violations
of law, rule or regulation;
(e) the identity of the loan officer who originated each loan
reported in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d)
of this Article and Paragraph;
(f) an analysis of concentrations of credit, significant
economic factors, and general conditions and their impact
on the credit quality of the Bank's loan and lease
portfolios;
(g) the identification and amount of loans and leases to
executive officers, directors, principal shareholders (and
their related interests) of the Bank; and
<PAGE>
(h) the identification of loans and leases not in conformance
with the Bank's lending and leasing policies, and
exceptions to the Bank's lending and leasing policies.
(5) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the program and
systems developed pursuant to this Article.
<PAGE>
Article VIII
LOAN REVIEW
-----------
(1) Within sixty (60) days, the Board shall establish an effective,
independent and ongoing loan review system to review, at least quarterly, the
Bank's loan and lease portfolios to assure the timely identification and
categorization of problem credits. The system shall provide for a written report
to be filed with the Board after each review and shall use a loan and lease
grading system consistent with the guidelines set forth in Section 215 of the
COMPTROLLER'S HANDBOOK FOR NATIONAL BANK EXAMINERS. Such reports shall, at a
minimum, include conclusions regarding:
(a) the overall quality of the loan and lease portfolios;
(b) the identification, type, rating, and amount of problem
loans and leases;
(c) the identification and amount of delinquent loans and
leases;
(d) credit and collateral documentation exceptions;
(e) the identification and status of credit related violations
of law, rule or regulation;
(f) the identity of the loan officer who originated each loan
reported in accordance with subparagraphs (b) through (e)
of the Article;
(g) concentrations of credit;
(h) loans and leases to executive officers, directors,
principal shareholders (and their related interests) of the
Bank; and
(i) loans and leases not in conformance with the Bank's lending
and leasing policies, and exceptions to the Bank's lending
and leasing policies.
<PAGE>
(2) Within sixty (60) days, the Board shall develop, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to a written program providing for independent
review of problem loans and leases in the Bank's loan and lease portfolios for
the purpose of monitoring portfolio trends, on at least a quarterly basis. The
program shall require a quarterly report to the Board. At a minimum, the program
shall provide for an independent reviewer's assessment of the Bank's:
(a) monitoring systems for early problem loan identification to
assure the timely identification and rating of loans and
leases based on lending officer submissions;
(b) statistical records that serve as a basis for identifying
sources of problem loans and leases by industry, size,
collateral, division, group, indirect dealer, and
individual lending officer;
(c) system for monitoring previously charged-off assets and
their recovery potential;
(d) system for monitoring compliance with the Bank's lending
policies and laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to the
Bank's lending function; and
(e) system for monitoring the adequacy of credit and collateral
documentation.
(3) A written description of the program called for in this Article
shall be forwarded to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review and approval.
(4) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the program
developed pursuant to this Article.
<PAGE>
(5) The Board shall evaluate the internal loan and lease review
report(s) and shall ensure that immediate, adequate and continuing remedial
action, if appropriate, is taken upon all findings noted in the report(s).
(6) A copy of the reports submitted to the Board, as well as
documentation of the action taken by the Bank to collect or strengthen assets
identified as problem credits, shall be preserved in the Bank.
Article IX
CRITICIZED ASSETS
-----------------
(1) The Bank shall take immediate and continuing action to protect
its interest in those assets criticized in the ROE, in any subsequent Report of
Examination, by internal or external loan review, or in any list provided to
management by the National Bank Examiners during any examination.
(2) Within sixty (60) days, the Board shall adopt, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to a written program designed to eliminate the
basis of criticism of assets criticized in the ROE, in any subsequent Report of
Examination, or by any internal or external loan review, or in any list provided
to management by the National Bank Examiners during any examination as
"doubtful," "substandard," or "special mention." This program shall include, at
a minimum:
(a) an identification of the expected sources of repayment;
(b) the appraised value of supporting collateral and the
position of the Bank's lien on such collateral where
applicable;
(c) an analysis of current and satisfactory credit information,
including cash flow analysis where loans are to be repaid
from operations; and
<PAGE>
(d) the proposed action to eliminate the basis of criticism and
the time frame for its accomplishment.
(3) Upon adoption, a copy of the program for all criticized assets
equal to or exceeding one hundred thousand dollars ($ 100,000) shall be
forwarded to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller.
(4) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the program
developed pursuant to this Article.
(5) The Board, or a designated committee, shall conduct a review, on
at least a quarterly basis, to determine:
(a) the status of each criticized asset or criticized portion
thereof that equals or exceeds one hundred thousand dollars
($100,000);
(b) management's adherence to the program adopted pursuant to
this Article;
(c) the status and effectiveness of the written program; and
the need to revise the program or take alternative action.
(6) A copy of each review shall be forwarded to the Assistant Deputy
Comptroller on a quarterly basis.
(7) The Bank may extend credit, directly or indirectly, including
renewals, extensions or capitalization of accrued interest, to a borrower whose
loans or other extensions of credit are criticized in the ROE, in any subsequent
Report of Examination, in any internal or external loan review, or in any list
provided to management by the National Bank Examiners during any examination and
whose aggregate loans or other extensions exceed one hundred thousand dollars ($
100,000) only if each of the following conditions is met:
(a) the Board or designated committee finds that the extension
of additional credit is necessary to promote the best
interests of the Bank and that prior to renewing, extending
or capitalizing any additional credit, a majority of the
full Board (or designated committee) approves the credit
extension and records, in writing, why such extension is
necessary to promote the best interests of the Bank; and
(b) a comparison to the written program adopted pursuant to
this Article shows that the Board's formal plan to collect
or strengthen the criticized assets will not be
compromised.
(8) A copy of the approval of the Board or of the designated
committee shall be maintained in the file of the affected borrower.
Article X
ADHERENCE TO LOAN POLICY
------------------------
(1) Within sixty (60) days, the Board shall establish a system to
track and analyze the aggregate volume of loans that do not conform to the
underwriting standards in the Bank's Loan Policies and Procedures Manual.
(2) Within sixty (60) days, the Board shall establish risk limits for
the aggregate volume of such loans and shall ensure that the Bank has processes,
personnel and control systems to prevent the Bank from exceeding such risk
limits in the future.
Article XI
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
------------------------
(1) Within sixty (60) days, the Board shall establish an
organizational structure that provides clear lines of authority and shall
eliminate any confusion concerning the authority and responsibilities of the
president and chief executive officer by developing detailed job descriptions
for each position.
<PAGE>
(2) Upon completion, a copy of the documents required in paragraph (1
) shall be forwarded to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review and
approval.
(3) The Board shall ensure that the Executive Loan Committee consists
of, at a minimum, two outside directors, a president who is a permanent and
full-time employee, and a senior lending officer who is a permanent and
full-time employee, as required by the Bank's policy and safe and sound banking
practices.
Article XII
CONFLICT OF INTEREST POLICY
(1) Within ninety (90) days, the Board shall review the Bank's
consulting agreement and relationship with Network Health Financial Services to
determine whether there are any actual or potential conflicts of interest
resulting therefrom and shall seek to eliminate or control any such conflicts by
amending the agreement or through other appropriate means.
(2) Within ninety (90) days, the Board shall adopt, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to a written, comprehensive conflict of
interest policy applicable to the Bank's and the Bank's holding company's
directors, principal shareholders, executive officers, affiliates, employees and
consultants (Insiders), and the related interests of such Insiders. The policy,
in addition to defining a conflict of interest, shall address:
(a) avoidance of conflicts of interest and breaches of
fiduciary duty, and the appearance of conflicts of
interest;
(b) involvement in the loan approval process of Insiders who
may benefit directly or indirectly from the decision to
grant credit;
<PAGE>
(c) disclosure of actual and potential conflicts of interest to
the Board, and periodic disclosure of "related interests"
as defined by 12 C.F.R. Part 215;
(d) disclosure of any Insider's material interest in the
business of a borrower, an applicant, or other customer of
the Bank; and
(e) restrictions on and disclosure of receipt of anything of
value by Insiders, directly or indirectly, from borrowers,
loan applicants, other customers, or suppliers of the Bank.
(3) Upon adoption, a copy of this conflict of interest policy shall
be forwarded to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review and approval.
(4) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the policy
developed pursuant to this Article.
(5) Within ninety (90) days, the Compliance Committee shall conduct a
review of the Bank's existing relationships with its and its holding company's
directors, executive officers, affiliates, principal shareholders, employees,
consultants and their related interests for the purpose of identifying
relationships not in conformity with the policy. The Board shall ensure that:
(a) any nonconforming relationships are brought into conformity
with the policy within ninety (90) days; and
(b) that within ninety (90) days the Bank is properly
reimbursed for:
(i) any excess or improper payments to Insiders and their
related interests; and
(ii) any excess or improper payments for services provided
by Insiders and their related interests.
<PAGE>
(6) Thereafter, the Board shall review all proposed transactions, or
modifications of existing relationships, between the Bank and any of its or its
holding company's directors, executive officers, affiliates, principal
shareholders, employees, consultants and their related interests. Documentation
supporting these reviews shall be in writing and preserved in the Bank.
Article XIII
STRATEGIC PLAN
--------------
(l) Within ninety (90) days, the Board shall adopt, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to a written strategic plan for the Bank
covering at least a three-year period. The strategic plan shall establish
objectives for the Bank's overall risk profile, earnings performance, growth,
balance sheet mix, off-balance sheet activities, liability structure, capital
adequacy, reduction in the volume of non-performing assets, product line
development and market segments that the Bank intends to promote or develop,
together with strategies to achieve those objectives and, at a minimum, include:
(a) a mission statement that forms the framework for the
establishment of strategic goals and objectives;
(b) an assessment of the Bank's present and future operating
environment;
(c) the development of strategic goals and objectives to be
accomplished over the short and long term;
(d) an identification of the Bank's present and future product
lines (assets and liabilities) that will be utilized to
accomplish the strategic goals and objectives established
in (l )(c) of this Article;
(e) an evaluation of the Bank's internal operations, staffing
requirements, board and management information systems and
policies and procedures for their adequacy and contribution
to the accomplishment of the goals and objectives developed
under (l)(c) of this Article;
<PAGE>
(f) a management employment and succession program to promote
the retention and continuity of capable management;
(g) product line development and market segments that the Bank
intends to promote or develop;
(h) a financial forecast to include projections for major
balance sheet and income statement accounts and desired
financial ratios over the period covered by the strategic
plan;
(i) control systems to mitigate risks associated with planned
new products, growth, or any proposed changes in the Bank's
operating environment;
(j) specific plans to establish responsibilities and
accountability for the strategic planning process, new
products, growth goals, or proposed changes in the Bank's
operating environment; and
(k) systems to monitor the Bank's progress in meeting the
plan's goals and objectives.
(2) Upon adoption, a copy of the plan shall be forwarded to the
Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review and approval.
(3) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the plan
developed pursuant to this Article.
Article XIV
PROFIT PLAN
-----------
<PAGE>
(1) Within sixty (60) days, the Board shall develop, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to a written profit plan to improve and sustain
the earnings of the Bank. This plan shall include, at minimum, the following
elements:
(a) identification of the major areas in and means by which the
Board will seek to improve the Bank's operating
performance;
(b) realistic and comprehensive budgets, including projected
balance sheets and year-end income statements;
(c) a budget review process to monitor both the Bank's income
and expenses, and to compare actual figures with budgetary
projections; and
(d) a description of the operating assumptions that form the
basis for major projected income and expense components.
(2) Upon completion, the budgets and related documents required in
paragraph (1) shall be submitted to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review
and approval. The Board shall submit to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller annual
budgets as described in paragraph (1) above for each year this Formal Agreement
remains in effect. The budget for each year shall be submitted on or before
December 31st of the preceding year.
(3) The Board shall forward comparisons of its balance sheet and
profit and loss statement to the profit plan projections to the Assistant Deputy
Comptroller on a quarterly basis.
(4) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the plan
developed pursuant to this and year-end income statements;
Article XV
CAPITAL PLAN AND HIGHER MINIMUMS
--------------------------------
<PAGE>
(1) The Bank shall achieve by September 30, 2000, and thereafter
maintain the following capital levels (as defined in 12 C.F.R. Parts 3 and 6):
(a) Total capital at least equal to ten percent (10%) of
risk-weighted assets;
(b) Tier 1 capital at least equal to six percent (6%) of
risk-weighted assets; and
(c) Tier 1 capital at least equal to five percent (5%) of
adjusted total assets.1
(2) Within sixty (90) days, the Board shall develop, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to a three-year capital program. The program
shall include:
(a) specific plans for the maintenance of adequate capital that
may in no event be less than the requirements of paragraph
(1);
(b) projections for growth and capital requirements based upon
a detailed analysis of the Bank's assets, liabilities,
earnings, fixed assets, and off balance sheet activities;
(c) projections of the sources and timing of additional capital
to meet the Bank's current and future needs;
(d) the primary source(s) from which the Bank will strengthen
its capital structure to meet the Bank's needs; and
(e) contingency plans that identify alternative methods should
the primary source(s) under (d) above not be available.
(3) Upon completion, the Bank's capital program shall be submitted to
the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review and approval. Upon approval by the
Assistant Deputy Comptroller, the Bank shall implement and adhere to the capital
program. The Board shall review and update the Bank's capital program on an
- ----------
(1) Adjusted total assets is defined in 12 C.F.R. ss. 3.2(a) as the average
total asset figure used for Call Report purposes minus end-of-quarter intangible
assets. As further noted in 12 C.F.R. ss. 3.2(a), a bank may be required to
compute anu maintain its leverage ratio on the basis of actual, rather than
average total assets. This language would have to be modified to reflect that
change.
<PAGE>
annual basis, or more frequently if necessary. Copies of the reviews and updates
shall be submitted to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller.
(4) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has processes, personnel,
and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the program
developed pursuant to this Article.
<PAGE>
Article XVI
VIOLATIONS OF LAW
-----------------
(1) The Board shall immediately take all necessary steps to ensure
that Bank management corrects, to the extent possible, each violation of law,
rule or regulation cited in the ROE and in any subsequent Report of Examination.
The monthly progress reports required by Article II of this Agreement shall
include the date and manner in which each correction has been effected during
that reporting period.
(2) Within ninety (90) days, the Board shall adopt, implement, and
thereafter ensure Bank adherence to specific procedures to prevent future
violations as cited in the ROE and shall adopt, implement, and ensure Bank
adherence to general procedures addressing compliance management that
incorporate internal control systems and education of employees regarding laws,
rules and regulations applicable to their areas of responsibility.
(3) Within sixty (60) days of receipt of any subsequent Report of
Examination which cites violations of law, rule or regulation, the Board shall
adopt, implement, and thereafter ensure Bank adherence to specific procedures to
prevent future violations as cited in the ROE and shall adopt, implement, and
ensure Bank adherence to general procedures addressing compliance management
which incorporate internal control systems and education of employees regarding
laws, rules and regulations applicable to their areas of responsibility.
(4) Upon adoption, a copy of these procedures shall be promptly
forwarded to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review and approval.
(5) The Board shall ensure that the Bank has policies, processes,
personnel, and control systems to ensure implementation of and adherence to the
procedures developed pursuant to this Article.
<PAGE>
Article XVII
CLOSING
-------
(1) Although the Board has agreed to submit certain programs and
reports to the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for review or approval, the Board
has the ultimate responsibility for proper and sound management of the Bank.
(2) It is expressly and clearly understood that if, at any time, the
Comptroller deems it appropriate in fulfilling the responsibilities placed upon
him by the several laws of the United States of America to undertake any action
affecting the Bank, nothing in this Agreement shall in any way inhibit, stop,
bar, or otherwise prevent the Comptroller from so doing.
(3) Any time limitations imposed by this Agreement shall begin to run
from the effective date of this Agreement. Such time requirements may be
extended in writing by the Assistant Deputy Comptroller for good cause upon
written application by the Board.
(4) The provisions of this Agreement shall be effective upon
execution by the parties hereto and its provisions shall continue in full force
and effect unless or until such provisions are amended in writing by mutual
consent of the parties to the Agreement or excepted, waived, or terminated in
writing by the Comptroller.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the undersigned, authorized by the Comptroller,
has hereunto set his hand on behalf of the Comptroller.
- ------------------------------- ----------------------------
John F. Robinson Date
Deputy Comptroller
Western District
<PAGE>
Western District
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the undersigned, as the duly elected and acting Board of
Directors of the Bank, have hereunto set their hands on behalf of the Bank.
/s/ Melinda McIntyre-Kolpin 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Melinda McIntyre-Kolpin Date
/s/ Gene Franklin Gaines 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Gene Franklin Gaines Date
/s/ Richard Berger 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Richard Berger Date
/s/ Terry Hartshorn 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Terry Hartshorn Date
/s/ Walter T. Mullikin 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Walter T. Mullikin Date
/s/ Donald L. Katz 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Ronald L. Katz Date
/s/ Lynn O. Poulson 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Lynn O. Poulson Date
/s/ Robert Margolis 3/22/2000
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Robert Margolis Date
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Date
- ------------------------------------ ----------------------------
Date
EXHIBIT 10.24
KEY EMPLOYEE RETENTION INCENTIVE AGREEMENT
This Agreement is made this 21st day of December, 1999, between FIRST
PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A. ("Bank") and NANCY FERRETTI-FOSTER ("Employee").
RECITALS
--------
WHEREAS, Bank desires to retain its long-term key employees by
rewarding long term employment with the Bank; and
WHEREAS, Employee, Senior Vice President and Chief Information
Officer, is a key employee of Bank.
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and promises
contained herein, the parties hereby agree as follows:
1. PURPOSE. The purpose of this Agreement is to reward Employee for
Employee's ability, loyalty and exceptional service, and to provide incentive
compensation as an incentive for Employee to remain an employee of the Bank.
2. INCENTIVE COMPENSATION. As an incentive for Employee's continued
employment, Bank shall provide the following incentive compensation to Employee
upon the terms and conditions set forth herein:
(a) COMPENSATION. In the event of: (i) a merger where the Bank is
not the surviving entity; (ii) a transfer of all or substantially all of the
assets of the Bank; or (iii) any other corporate reorganization where there is a
change of ownership in the Bank of at least fifty-one percent (51%), except as
may result from a transfer of shares to another corporation in exchange for at
least eighty percent (80%) control of that corporation (any of the events
described in clauses (i) through (iii) being referred to herein as a "Sale
Transaction"), as a result of which at any time within two (2) years from the
effective date of the Sale Transaction (A) Employee's employment is terminated
without cause, (B) Employee's annual base compensation is reduced by more than
25% over the previous year, or (C) 9947 12/14/1999 12:51 PM without Employee's
<PAGE>
consent, the location of Employee's place of employment with Bank is changed to
a place more than 75 miles away from Employee's place of employment at the time
of the Sale Transaction (any of the events described in clauses (A) through (C)
being referred to herein as a "Triggering Event"), Bank shall pay to Employee an
amount equal to the monthly base salary that Employee is earning at the time of
such Triggering Event (the "Monthly Base Salary") for each year Employee was
employed by the Bank prior to the Triggering Event (less withholding and other
applicable taxes required by law), with a minimum award of six (6) months of the
Monthly Base Salary and up to a maximum award of twelve (12) months of the
Monthly Base Salary (the "Additional Compensation"). Bank shall pay the
Additional Compensation on a monthly basis, in monthly amounts equal to the
Monthly Base Salary, beginning with the first payroll after the Triggering
Event. Employee shall make a good faith effort to obtain alternate employment
after the termination of Employee's employment with Bank, and shall promptly
notify Bank of the obtainment of any employment and the monthly base salary to
be paid by the new employer. The Additional Compensation shall be reduced by the
amount of any compensation (including salary, bonus, consulting fees or
unemployment benefits) that Employee receives during the period any Additional
Compensation is to be paid by Bank hereunder.
As a condition precedent to the payment of the Additional
Compensation, Employee shall execute a Settlement Agreement and Release,
acceptable in form to the Bank, releasing Bank from any and all claims relating
to Employee's employment with Bank up through the date of the Settlement
Agreement and Release, in substantially the form attached hereto as Exhibit A.
Employee acknowledges that it may be necessary to amend or modify the form of
Release at the time of execution to maintain its effectiveness in accordance
with changes in federal or state laws or regulations or case law. Employee
hereby acknowledges that Employee must sign the Release, as it may be amended or
modified as of the date of Employee's execution of the Release, as a condition
precedent to receiving any Additional Compensation.
<PAGE>
(b) STOCK OPTIONS. Bank has caused its parent company, Professional
Bancorp, Inc. ("PBI"), to grant to Employee options to purchase 5,000 shares of
common stock of PBI (the "Options") as consideration for this Agreement. The
Options shall be exercisable as follows: (i) options to purchase 1,667 shares
shall be exercisable upon Employee's execution of this Agreement, (ii) options
to purchase 1,667 shares shall be exercisable on the first anniversary date of
this Agreement if Employee is still employed by the Bank on such date, and (iii)
the options to purchase the remaining 1,666 shares shall be exercisable on the
second anniversary date of this Agreement if Employee is still employed by the
Bank on such date.
3. EMPLOYMENT AT WILL. Employee's employment with Bank remains
at-will. This Agreement does not create a contract of employment between Bank
and Employee. This Agreement does not limit the right of the Bank to discharge
Employee for any reason, or for no reason. Employee may also terminate her
employment with Bank at any for any reason or for no reason at all.
4. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This instrument contains the entire agreement of
the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof. No change, modification,
amendment, or alteration to this Agreement shall be valid unless in writing and
signed by the parties hereto.
5. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement shall be governed and construed and
the legal relationship and obligations of the parties determined in accordance
with the laws of the State of California.
6. SEVERABILITY. The provisions in this Agreement are severable. The
invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this Agreement shall not
affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision hereof.
7. ASSIGNABILITY. Employee acknowledges that this Agreement and the
benefits hereunder are personal to Bank and Employee and are not assignable or
transferable by Employee. This Agreement shall be binding upon all and inure to
the benefit of Employee's and Bank's heirs, successors and assigns.
<PAGE>
8. ARBITRATION. The parties hereto agree that any disputes arising
out of or related to this Agreement shall be settled by final and binding
arbitration in Santa Monica or Los Angeles, California in accordance with the
commercial arbitration rules of the American Arbitration Association.
FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
By: /s/ Gene Gaines
Gene Gaines, Chief Executive Officer
/s//s/ NANCY FERRETTI-FOSTER
NANCY FERRETTI-FOSTER
- -4-
<PAGE>
EXHIBIT A
RELEASE OF CLAIMS
-----------------
THIS AGREEMENT is made this _____ day of __________________, _____,
between NANCY FERRETTI-FOSTER ("Employee") and FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
("Employer").
BACKGROUND
----------
A. Employer and Employee entered into a Key Employee Retention
Incentive Agreement dated ________________, 1999 (the "Incentive Agreement"),
pursuant to which Employee shall be paid Additional Compensation (as defined in
the Incentive Agreement) in consideration for executing this Release of Claims.
B. Employee desires to receive the Additional Compensation and
Employee and Employer want to settle any issues through the date of this
Agreement related to Employee's employment by Employer, including any present or
past claims by Employee against the Employer or Professional Bancorp, Inc., and
their respective directors, officers, employees, legal representatives and
agents (collectively, the "Employer Group").
NOW THEREFORE, Employer and Employee promise, agree and state as
follows:
1. Employee promises, agrees and states that:
a. Employee's employment with Employer ended on ____________,
199__;
b. Employee has not filed and will not file or appeal, any
lawsuit, administrative charge, or other claim about his/her employment arising
on or before the date hereof, or any lawsuit, charge or claim, filed or
appealed, shall be dismissed or withdrawn by Employee permanently without right
to refile or renew that lawsuit, charge or claim;
c. Employee forever waives and releases Employer and the
Employer Group from any and all claims, including race, sex, national origin,
handicap, religious, benefit or age discrimination or retaliation under (1)
Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, (42 United States Code beginning at
Section 2000e); (2) the Employee Retirement Income Security Act or ERISA, (29
United States Code beginning at Section 1001); (3) the Reconstruction Era Civil
Rights Acts (42 United States Code beginning at Section 1981); (4) the Age
Discrimination in Employment Act "ADEA" (29 United States Code, Sections 621
through 634); (5) the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 "ADA" (42 United
States Code beginning at Section 12111); and (6) the Family and Medical Leave
Act of 1993 "FMLA" (29 United States Code beginning at Section 2601) arising out
of an act or omission occurring on or before the date hereof.
d. Employee further forever waives and releases the Employer
Group from any and all claims, liabilities, damages, penalties, obligations,
actions and causes of action (hereinafter "Claims"), whether past, present or
future, whether now known or unknown, and whether arising out of common law,
constitution, statute or regulation as long as the Claim arises out of an act or
omission occurring on or before the date of this Agreement, which includes but
is not limited to Claims arising out of or relating to Employee's employment or
Employee's termination, breach of contract, defamation, misrepresentation,
public policy, wrongful or constructive termination, infliction of emotional
distress, or the California Fair Employment and Housing Act, as amended,
California Government Code ss.12900, et seq., and the California Labor Code, or
other applicable discrimination laws oR regulations.
<PAGE>
e. Employee forever waives and gives up any right to payment of
attorneys' fees.
f. If Employee's employment with Employer has been terminated,
Employee forever waives and renounces any right to reinstatement of employment,
whether temporary or permanent, part-time or full-time, in any capacity with
Employer, and promises never to apply for or otherwise seek employment with
Employer.
g. As part of this general release, and not by way of
limitation, Employee expressly waives any right Employee may have under ss.1542
of the California Civil Code, which states:
"A general release does not extend to claims which the
creditor does not know or suspect to exist in his favor at the time of executing
the release, which if known by him must have materially affected his settlement
with the debtor."
h. Employee understands and agrees that Employee may later
discover facts in addition to or different from those which Employee now knows
or believes to be true with respect to the subject matters of this Agreement,
but that it is nevertheless Employee's intention by signing this Agreement to
fully, finally and forever release any and all claims, whether now known or
unknown, suspected or unsuspected, which now exist, may exist or previously have
existed as set forth herein.
2. Employee also promises and agrees not to make any negative or
disparaging remarks about Employer or to volunteer, start or encourage any
statement or action that could hurt the business or reputation of the Employer.
3. Employee agrees that any breach of the Employee's promises and
releases in Sections 1 and 2 of this Agreement and Release will entitle the
Employer to recover everything paid to Employee under this Agreement and the
Incentive Agreement plus damages, including attorney fees and all litigation
expenses, and equitable relief.
4. In consideration of this Agreement, Employer agrees that, unless
this Agreement is revoked by Employee under Section 13(c) below, Employee shall
receive the Additional Compensation on the terms set forth in the Incentive
Agreement.
5. Employer does not admit any violation of any federal or state
statute, the common law, or Employee's rights. To the contrary, the Employer
denies any violation and makes this Agreement only to settle finally all claims
and issues relating to Employee's employment and termination thereof, if
applicable.
6. Employee represents and acknowledges that in executing this
Agreement Employee does not rely and has not relied upon any promise,
representation or statement not in this Agreement and Release made by the
Employer or the Employer's attorneys about the subject matter, basis or effect
of this Agreement or otherwise.
7. The provisions of this Agreement and Release are severable; if any
part of it is found to be unenforceable, the remaining parts shall remain fully
valid and enforceable.
<PAGE>
8. Each party has adequate knowledge of the facts and law with
respect to the advisability of making the settlement provided for within, with
respect to the advisability of executing this agreement, and with respect to the
meaning of California Civil Code Section 1542. Each party has made such
investigation of the facts pertaining to this settlement and this Agreement, and
all of the matters pertaining thereto, as the party deems necessary. Each party
has read this Agreement and understands the contents thereof.
9. This Agreement shall be deemed to have been executed and delivered
within the State of California and the rights and obligations of the parties
hereunder shall be construed and enforced in accordance with, and governed by,
the laws of the State of California.
10. This Agreement is the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior and
contemporaneous oral and written agreements and discussions. This Agreement may
be amended only by an agreement in writing, signed by all parties hereto. In the
event of arbitration or litigation hereafter arising from or relating to this
Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable attorneys' fees
and costs.
11. This Agreement is binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of
the parties hereto, and their respective successors.
12. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, and when each
party has signed and delivered at least one such counterpart, each counterpart
shall be deemed an original, and, when taken together with the other signed
counterpart(s), shall constitute one Agreement which shall be binding upon and
effective as to all parties.
13. Employee is hereby advised:
a. to CONSULT WITH AN ATTORNEY BEFORE SIGNING THIS
AGREEMENT;
b. that EMPLOYEE HAS TWENTY-ONE (21) DAYS WITHIN WHICH TO
CONSIDER AND SIGN THIS AGREEMENT; and
c. that EMPLOYEE MAY CANCEL THIS AGREEMENT WITHIN SEVEN
(7) DAYS AFTER SIGNING THIS AGREEMENT; and that this
Agreement is not effective or enforceable until this
seven (7) day period has expired.
14. EMPLOYEE, BY SIGNING THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS AND INTENDS TO
WAIVE ALL CLAIMS AGAINST THE EMPLOYER GROUP, INCLUDING ALL CLAIMS FOR FEES.
EMPLOYEE ADMITS EMPLOYEE ENTERS INTO THIS AGREEMENT KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND
AFTER HAVING CONSULTED WITH OR HAVING THE OPPORTUNITY TO CONSULT WITH AN
ATTORNEY FOR A COMPLETE REVIEW OF THIS DOCUMENT.
Employee and Employer have read this Settlement Agreement and
Release, and by signing below, indicate their knowing and voluntary agreement to
its terms.
NANCY FERRETTI-FOSTER FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
__________________________________ By: _____________________________
Title: __________________________
Date: _____________________________ Date: ___________________________
EXHIBIT 10.25
KEY EMPLOYEE RETENTION INCENTIVE AGREEMENT
This Agreement is made this 21stday of December, 1999, between FIRST
PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A. ("Bank") and SHARON SCHMIDT ("Employee").
RECITALS
WHEREAS, Bank desires to retain its long-term key employees by
rewarding long term employment with the Bank; and
WHEREAS, Employee, Senior Vice President and Chief Operations
Officer, is a key employee of Bank.
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and promises
contained herein, the parties hereby agree as follows:
1. PURPOSE. The purpose of this Agreement is to reward Employee for
Employee's ability, loyalty and exceptional service, and to provide incentive
compensation as an incentive for Employee to remain an employee of the Bank.
2. INCENTIVE COMPENSATION. As an incentive for Employee's continued
employment, Bank shall provide the following incentive compensation to Employee
upon the terms and conditions set forth herein:
(a) COMPENSATION. In the event of: (i) a merger where the Bank is
not the surviving entity; (ii) a transfer of all or substantially all of the
assets of the Bank; or (iii) any other corporate reorganization where there is a
change of ownership in the Bank of at least fifty-one percent (51%), except as
may result from a transfer of shares to another corporation in exchange for at
least eighty percent (80%) control of that corporation (any of the events
described in clauses (i) through (iii) being referred to herein as a "Sale
Transaction"), as a result of which at any time within two (2) years from the
effective date of the Sale Transaction (A) Employee's employment is terminated
without cause, (B) Employee's annual base compensation is reduced by more than
25% over the previous year, or (C) 10042 12/14/1999 12:53 PM
<PAGE>
without Employee's consent, the location of Employee's place of employment with
Bank is changed to a place more than 75 miles away from Employee's place of
employment at the time of the Sale Transaction (any of the events described in
clauses (A) through (C) being referred to herein as a "Triggering Event"), Bank
shall pay to Employee an amount equal to the monthly base salary that Employee
is earning at the time of such Triggering Event (the "Monthly Base Salary") for
each year Employee was employed by the Bank prior to the Triggering Event (less
withholding and other applicable taxes required by law), with a minimum award of
six (6) months of the Monthly Base Salary and up to a maximum award of twelve
(12) months of the Monthly Base Salary (the "Additional Compensation"). Bank
shall pay the Additional Compensation on a monthly basis, in monthly amounts
equal to the Monthly Base Salary, beginning with the first payroll after the
Triggering Event. Employee shall make a good faith effort to obtain alternate
employment after the termination of Employee's employment with Bank, and shall
promptly notify Bank of the obtainment of any employment and the monthly base
salary to be paid by the new employer. The Additional Compensation shall be
reduced by the amount of any compensation (including salary, bonus, consulting
fees or unemployment benefits) that Employee receives during the period any
Additional Compensation is to be paid by Bank hereunder.
As a condition precedent to the payment of the Additional
Compensation, Employee shall execute a Settlement Agreement and Release,
acceptable in form to the Bank, releasing Bank from any and all claims relating
to Employee's employment with Bank up through the date of the Settlement
Agreement and Release, in substantially the form attached hereto as Exhibit A.
Employee acknowledges that it may be necessary to amend or modify the form of
Release at the time of execution to maintain its effectiveness in accordance
with changes in federal or state laws or regulations or case law. Employee
hereby acknowledges that Employee must sign the Release, as it may be amended or
modified as of the date of Employee's execution of the Release, as a condition
precedent to receiving any Additional Compensation.
-2-
<PAGE>
(b) STOCK OPTIONS. Bank has caused its parent company, Professional
Bancorp, Inc. ("PBI"), to grant to Employee options to purchase 5,000 shares of
common stock of PBI (the "Options") as consideration for this Agreement. The
Options shall be exercisable as follows: (i) options to purchase 1,667 shares
shall be exercisable upon Employee's execution of this Agreement, (ii) options
to purchase 1,667 shares shall be exercisable on the first anniversary date of
this Agreement if Employee is still employed by the Bank on such date, and (iii)
the options to purchase the remaining 1,666 shares shall be exercisable on the
second anniversary date of this Agreement if Employee is still employed by the
Bank on such date.
3. EMPLOYMENT AT WILL. Employee's employment with Bank remains
at-will. This Agreement does not create a contract of employment between Bank
and Employee. This Agreement does not limit the right of the Bank to discharge
Employee for any reason, or for no reason. Employee may also terminate her
employment with Bank at any for any reason or for no reason at all.
4. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This instrument contains the entire agreement of
the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof. No change, modification,
amendment, or alteration to this Agreement shall be valid unless in writing and
signed by the parties hereto.
5. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement shall be governed and construed and
the legal relationship and obligations of the parties determined in accordance
with the laws of the State of California.
6. SEVERABILITY. The provisions in this Agreement are severable. The
invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this Agreement shall not
affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision hereof.
7. ASSIGNABILITY. Employee acknowledges that this Agreement and the
benefits hereunder are personal to Bank and Employee and are not assignable or
transferable by Employee. This Agreement shall be binding upon all and inure to
the benefit of Employee's and Bank's heirs, successors and assigns.
-3-
<PAGE>
8. ARBITRATION. The parties hereto agree that any disputes arising
out of or related to this Agreement shall be settled by final and binding
arbitration in Santa Monica or Los Angeles, California in accordance with the
commercial arbitration rules of the American Arbitration Association.
FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
By: /s/Gene Gaines
Gene Gaines, Chief Executive Officer
/s/SHARON SCHMIDT
SHARON SCHMIDT
-4-
<PAGE>
EXHIBIT A
RELEASE OF CLAIMS
-----------------
THIS AGREEMENT is made this _____ day of __________________, _____,
between SHARON SCHMIDT ("Employee") and FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
("Employer").
BACKGROUND
----------
A. Employer and Employee entered into a Key Employee Retention
Incentive Agreement dated ________________, 1999 (the "Incentive Agreement"),
pursuant to which Employee shall be paid Additional Compensation (as defined in
the Incentive Agreement) in consideration for executing this Release of Claims.
B. Employee desires to receive the Additional Compensation and
Employee and Employer want to settle any issues through the date of this
Agreement related to Employee's employment by Employer, including any present or
past claims by Employee against the Employer or Professional Bancorp, Inc., and
their respective directors, officers, employees, legal representatives and
agents (collectively, the "Employer Group").
NOW THEREFORE, Employer and Employee promise, agree and state as
follows:
1. Employee promises, agrees and states that:
a. Employee's employment with Employer ended on
____________, 199__;
b. Employee has not filed and will not file or appeal, any
lawsuit, administrative charge, or other claim about his/her employment arising
on or before the date hereof, or any lawsuit, charge or claim, filed or
appealed, shall be dismissed or withdrawn by Employee permanently without right
to refile or renew that lawsuit, charge or claim;
c. Employee forever waives and releases Employer and the
Employer Group from any and all claims, including race, sex, national origin,
handicap, religious, benefit or age discrimination or retaliation under (1)
Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, (42 United States Code beginning at
Section 2000e); (2) the Employee Retirement Income Security Act or ERISA, (29
United States Code beginning at Section 1001); (3) the Reconstruction Era Civil
Rights Acts (42 United States Code beginning at Section 1981); (4) the Age
Discrimination in Employment Act "ADEA" (29 United States Code, Sections 621
through 634); (5) the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 "ADA" (42 United
States Code beginning at Section 12111); and (6) the Family and Medical Leave
Act of 1993 "FMLA" (29 United States Code beginning at Section 2601) arising out
of an act or omission occurring on or before the date hereof.
d. Employee further forever waives and releases the
Employer Group from any and all claims, liabilities, damages, penalties,
obligations, actions and causes of action (hereinafter "Claims"), whether past,
present or future, whether now known or unknown, and whether arising out of
common law, constitution, statute or regulation as long as the Claim arises out
of an act or omission occurring on or before the date of this Agreement, which
includes but is not limited to Claims arising out of or relating to Employee's
employment or Employee's termination, breach of contract, defamation,
misrepresentation, public policy, wrongful or constructive termination,
infliction of emotional distress, or the California Fair Employment and Housing
Act, as amended, California Government Code ss.12900, et seq., and the
California Labor Code, or other applicable discrimination laws or regulations.
<PAGE>
e. Employee forever waives and gives up any right to
payment of attorneys' fees.
f. If Employee's employment with Employer has been
terminated, Employee forever waives and renounces any right to reinstatement of
employment, whether temporary or permanent, part-time or full-time, in any
capacity with Employer, and promises never to apply for or otherwise seek
employment with Employer.
g. As part of this general release, and not by way of
limitation, Employee expressly waives any right Employee may have under ss.1542
of the California Civil Code, which states:
"A general release does not extend to claims
which the creditor does not know or suspect to exist in
his favor at the time of executing the release, which if known by him must have
materially affected his settlement with the debtor."
h. Employee understands and agrees that Employee may later
discover facts in addition to or different from those which Employee now knows
or believes to be true with respect to the subject matters of this Agreement,
but that it is nevertheless Employee's intention by signing this Agreement to
fully, finally and forever release any and all claims, whether now known or
unknown, suspected or unsuspected, which now exist, may exist or previously have
existed as set forth herein.
2. Employee also promises and agrees not to make any negative or
disparaging remarks about Employer or to volunteer, start or encourage any
statement or action that could hurt the business or reputation of the Employer.
3. Employee agrees that any breach of the Employee's promises and
releases in Sections 1 and 2 of this Agreement and Release will entitle the
Employer to recover everything paid to Employee under this Agreement and the
Incentive Agreement plus damages, including attorney fees and all litigation
expenses, and equitable relief.
4. In consideration of this Agreement, Employer agrees that, unless
this Agreement is revoked by Employee under Section 13(c) below, Employee shall
receive the Additional Compensation on the terms set forth in the Incentive
Agreement.
5. Employer does not admit any violation of any federal or state
statute, the common law, or Employee's rights. To the contrary, the Employer
denies any violation and makes this Agreement only to settle finally all claims
and issues relating to Employee's employment and termination thereof, if
applicable.
6. Employee represents and acknowledges that in executing this
Agreement Employee does not rely and has not relied upon any promise,
representation or statement not in this Agreement and Release made by the
Employer or the Employer's attorneys about the subject matter, basis or effect
of this Agreement or otherwise.
7. The provisions of this Agreement and Release are severable; if any
part of it is found to be unenforceable, the remaining parts shall remain fully
valid and enforceable.
-2-
<PAGE>
8. Each party has adequate knowledge of the facts and law with
respect to the advisability of making the settlement provided for within, with
respect to the advisability of executing this agreement, and with respect to the
meaning of California Civil Code Section 1542. Each party has made such
investigation of the facts pertaining to this settlement and this Agreement, and
all of the matters pertaining thereto, as the party deems necessary. Each party
has read this Agreement and understands the contents thereof.
9. This Agreement shall be deemed to have been executed and delivered
within the State of California and the rights and obligations of the parties
hereunder shall be construed and enforced in accordance with, and governed by,
the laws of the State of California.
10. This Agreement is the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior and
contemporaneous oral and written agreements and discussions. This Agreement may
be amended only by an agreement in writing, signed by all parties hereto. In the
event of arbitration or litigation hereafter arising from or relating to this
Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable attorneys' fees
and costs.
11. This Agreement is binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of
the parties hereto, and their respective successors.
12. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, and when each
party has signed and delivered at least one such counterpart, each counterpart
shall be deemed an original, and, when taken together with the other signed
counterpart(s), shall constitute one Agreement which shall be binding upon and
effective as to all parties.
13. Employee is hereby advised:
a. to CONSULT WITH AN ATTORNEY BEFORE SIGNING THIS
AGREEMENT;
b. that EMPLOYEE HAS TWENTY-ONE (21) DAYS WITHIN WHICH
TO CONSIDER AND SIGN THIS AGREEMENT; and
c. that EMPLOYEE MAY CANCEL THIS AGREEMENT WITHIN SEVEN
(7) DAYS AFTER SIGNING THIS AGREEMENT; and that this
Agreement is not effective or enforceable until this
seven (7) day period has expired.
14. EMPLOYEE, BY SIGNING THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS AND INTENDS TO
WAIVE ALL CLAIMS AGAINST THE EMPLOYER GROUP, INCLUDING ALL CLAIMS FOR FEES.
EMPLOYEE ADMITS EMPLOYEE ENTERS INTO THIS AGREEMENT KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND
AFTER HAVING CONSULTED WITH OR HAVING THE OPPORTUNITY TO CONSULT WITH AN
ATTORNEY FOR A COMPLETE REVIEW OF THIS DOCUMENT.
Employee and Employer have read this Settlement Agreement and
Release, and by signing below, indicate their knowing and voluntary agreement to
its terms.
SHARON SCHMIDT FIRST PROFESSIONAL BANK, N.A.
__________________________________ By: _________________________________
Title: ______________________________
Date: _____________________________ Date: _______________________________
-3-
Exhibit 23.1
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS
We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration
Statement on Form S-8 (No. 33-63379) of Professional Bancorp, Inc. of our report
dated January 28, 2000 appearing in item 8 in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.
MOSS ADAMS LLP
Los Angeles, California
March 29, 2000
EXHIBIT 23.2
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' CONSENT
The Board of Directors
Professional Bancorp, Inc.:
We consent to incorporation by reference in the registration statement (No.
33-63379) on Form S-8, of Professional Bancorp, Inc. of our report dated April
19, 1999, with respect to the consolidated balance sheet of Professional
Bancorp, Inc. and subsidiary as of December 31, 1998 and the related
consolidated statements of operations and comprehensive income, changes in
shareholders' equity and cash flows for each of the years in the two-year period
ended December 31, 1998, which appears in the December 31, 1999 annual report on
Form 10-K of Professional Bancorp, Inc.
KPMG LLP
Los Angeles, California
March 29, 2000
<TABLE> <S> <C>
<ARTICLE> 9
<S> <C>
<FISCAL-YEAR-END> DEC-31-1999
<PERIOD-END> DEC-31-1999
<PERIOD-TYPE> 12-MOS
<PERIOD-START> JAN-01-1999
<CASH> 15,721
<INT-BEARING-DEPOSITS> 698
<FED-FUNDS-SOLD> 27,000
<TRADING-ASSETS> 0
<INVESTMENTS-HELD-FOR-SALE> 45,525
<INVESTMENTS-CARRYING> 18,200
<INVESTMENTS-MARKET> 0
<LOANS> 162,357
<ALLOWANCE> 5,873
<TOTAL-ASSETS> 273,490
<DEPOSITS> 256,028
<SHORT-TERM> 0
<LIABILITIES-OTHER> 1,915
<LONG-TERM> 679
<COMMON> 14,870
0
0
<OTHER-SE> 0
<TOTAL-LIABILITIES-AND-EQUITY> 273,490
<INTEREST-LOAN> 12,762
<INTEREST-INVEST> 4,375
<INTEREST-OTHER> 1,158
<INTEREST-TOTAL> 18,295
<INTEREST-DEPOSIT> 3,259
<INTEREST-EXPENSE> 3,413
<INTEREST-INCOME-NET> 14,882
<LOAN-LOSSES> 13,993
<SECURITIES-GAINS> 40
<EXPENSE-OTHER> 14,300
<INCOME-PRETAX> (11,558)
<INCOME-PRE-EXTRAORDINARY> (8,359)
<EXTRAORDINARY> (10,750)
<CHANGES> 0
<NET-INCOME> (8,359)
<EPS-BASIC> (4.15)
<EPS-DILUTED> (4.15)
<YIELD-ACTUAL> 6.27
<LOANS-NON> 8,412
<LOANS-PAST> 0
<LOANS-TROUBLED> 0
<LOANS-PROBLEM> 0
<ALLOWANCE-OPEN> 2,200
<CHARGE-OFFS> 10,452
<RECOVERIES> 133
<ALLOWANCE-CLOSE> 5,873
<ALLOWANCE-DOMESTIC> 5,873
<ALLOWANCE-FOREIGN> 0
<ALLOWANCE-UNALLOCATED> 945
</TABLE>
